1 /* Subroutines used for code generation on IBM S/390 and zSeries
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
3 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 Contributed by Hartmut Penner (hpenner@de.ibm.com) and
5 Ulrich Weigand (uweigand@de.ibm.com) and
6 Andreas Krebbel (Andreas.Krebbel@de.ibm.com).
8 This file is part of GCC.
10 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
11 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
12 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
15 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
16 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
17 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
20 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
21 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
22 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
26 #include "coretypes.h"
32 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
34 #include "insn-config.h"
35 #include "conditions.h"
37 #include "insn-attr.h"
45 #include "basic-block.h"
46 #include "integrate.h"
49 #include "target-def.h"
51 #include "langhooks.h"
57 /* Define the specific costs for a given cpu. */
59 struct processor_costs
62 const int m
; /* cost of an M instruction. */
63 const int mghi
; /* cost of an MGHI instruction. */
64 const int mh
; /* cost of an MH instruction. */
65 const int mhi
; /* cost of an MHI instruction. */
66 const int ml
; /* cost of an ML instruction. */
67 const int mr
; /* cost of an MR instruction. */
68 const int ms
; /* cost of an MS instruction. */
69 const int msg
; /* cost of an MSG instruction. */
70 const int msgf
; /* cost of an MSGF instruction. */
71 const int msgfr
; /* cost of an MSGFR instruction. */
72 const int msgr
; /* cost of an MSGR instruction. */
73 const int msr
; /* cost of an MSR instruction. */
74 const int mult_df
; /* cost of multiplication in DFmode. */
77 const int sqxbr
; /* cost of square root in TFmode. */
78 const int sqdbr
; /* cost of square root in DFmode. */
79 const int sqebr
; /* cost of square root in SFmode. */
80 /* multiply and add */
81 const int madbr
; /* cost of multiply and add in DFmode. */
82 const int maebr
; /* cost of multiply and add in SFmode. */
94 const struct processor_costs
*s390_cost
;
97 struct processor_costs z900_cost
=
99 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* M */
100 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MGHI */
101 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* MH */
102 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MHI */
103 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* ML */
104 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* MR */
105 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MS */
106 COSTS_N_INSNS (15), /* MSG */
107 COSTS_N_INSNS (7), /* MSGF */
108 COSTS_N_INSNS (7), /* MSGFR */
109 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MSGR */
110 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSR */
111 COSTS_N_INSNS (7), /* multiplication in DFmode */
112 COSTS_N_INSNS (13), /* MXBR */
113 COSTS_N_INSNS (136), /* SQXBR */
114 COSTS_N_INSNS (44), /* SQDBR */
115 COSTS_N_INSNS (35), /* SQEBR */
116 COSTS_N_INSNS (18), /* MADBR */
117 COSTS_N_INSNS (13), /* MAEBR */
118 COSTS_N_INSNS (134), /* DXBR */
119 COSTS_N_INSNS (30), /* DDBR */
120 COSTS_N_INSNS (27), /* DEBR */
121 COSTS_N_INSNS (220), /* DLGR */
122 COSTS_N_INSNS (34), /* DLR */
123 COSTS_N_INSNS (34), /* DR */
124 COSTS_N_INSNS (32), /* DSGFR */
125 COSTS_N_INSNS (32), /* DSGR */
129 struct processor_costs z990_cost
=
131 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* M */
132 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* MGHI */
133 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* MH */
134 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* MHI */
135 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* ML */
136 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MR */
137 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* MS */
138 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* MSG */
139 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSGF */
140 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSGFR */
141 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSGR */
142 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSR */
143 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* multiplication in DFmode */
144 COSTS_N_INSNS (28), /* MXBR */
145 COSTS_N_INSNS (130), /* SQXBR */
146 COSTS_N_INSNS (66), /* SQDBR */
147 COSTS_N_INSNS (38), /* SQEBR */
148 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* MADBR */
149 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* MAEBR */
150 COSTS_N_INSNS (60), /* DXBR */
151 COSTS_N_INSNS (40), /* DDBR */
152 COSTS_N_INSNS (26), /* DEBR */
153 COSTS_N_INSNS (176), /* DLGR */
154 COSTS_N_INSNS (31), /* DLR */
155 COSTS_N_INSNS (31), /* DR */
156 COSTS_N_INSNS (31), /* DSGFR */
157 COSTS_N_INSNS (31), /* DSGR */
161 struct processor_costs z9_109_cost
=
163 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* M */
164 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* MGHI */
165 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* MH */
166 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* MHI */
167 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* ML */
168 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MR */
169 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* MS */
170 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* MSG */
171 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSGF */
172 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSGFR */
173 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSGR */
174 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* MSR */
175 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* multiplication in DFmode */
176 COSTS_N_INSNS (28), /* MXBR */
177 COSTS_N_INSNS (130), /* SQXBR */
178 COSTS_N_INSNS (66), /* SQDBR */
179 COSTS_N_INSNS (38), /* SQEBR */
180 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* MADBR */
181 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* MAEBR */
182 COSTS_N_INSNS (60), /* DXBR */
183 COSTS_N_INSNS (40), /* DDBR */
184 COSTS_N_INSNS (26), /* DEBR */
185 COSTS_N_INSNS (30), /* DLGR */
186 COSTS_N_INSNS (23), /* DLR */
187 COSTS_N_INSNS (23), /* DR */
188 COSTS_N_INSNS (24), /* DSGFR */
189 COSTS_N_INSNS (24), /* DSGR */
193 struct processor_costs z10_cost
=
195 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* M */
196 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MGHI */
197 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MH */
198 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MHI */
199 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* ML */
200 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MR */
201 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MS */
202 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MSG */
203 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MSGF */
204 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MSGFR */
205 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MSGR */
206 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MSR */
207 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* multiplication in DFmode */
208 COSTS_N_INSNS (50), /* MXBR */
209 COSTS_N_INSNS (120), /* SQXBR */
210 COSTS_N_INSNS (52), /* SQDBR */
211 COSTS_N_INSNS (38), /* SQEBR */
212 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MADBR */
213 COSTS_N_INSNS (10), /* MAEBR */
214 COSTS_N_INSNS (111), /* DXBR */
215 COSTS_N_INSNS (39), /* DDBR */
216 COSTS_N_INSNS (32), /* DEBR */
217 COSTS_N_INSNS (160), /* DLGR */
218 COSTS_N_INSNS (71), /* DLR */
219 COSTS_N_INSNS (71), /* DR */
220 COSTS_N_INSNS (71), /* DSGFR */
221 COSTS_N_INSNS (71), /* DSGR */
224 extern int reload_completed
;
226 /* Save information from a "cmpxx" operation until the branch or scc is
228 rtx s390_compare_op0
, s390_compare_op1
;
230 /* Save the result of a compare_and_swap until the branch or scc is
232 rtx s390_compare_emitted
= NULL_RTX
;
234 /* Structure used to hold the components of a S/390 memory
235 address. A legitimate address on S/390 is of the general
237 base + index + displacement
238 where any of the components is optional.
240 base and index are registers of the class ADDR_REGS,
241 displacement is an unsigned 12-bit immediate constant. */
252 /* Which cpu are we tuning for. */
253 enum processor_type s390_tune
= PROCESSOR_max
;
254 enum processor_flags s390_tune_flags
;
255 /* Which instruction set architecture to use. */
256 enum processor_type s390_arch
;
257 enum processor_flags s390_arch_flags
;
259 HOST_WIDE_INT s390_warn_framesize
= 0;
260 HOST_WIDE_INT s390_stack_size
= 0;
261 HOST_WIDE_INT s390_stack_guard
= 0;
263 /* The following structure is embedded in the machine
264 specific part of struct function. */
266 struct s390_frame_layout
GTY (())
268 /* Offset within stack frame. */
269 HOST_WIDE_INT gprs_offset
;
270 HOST_WIDE_INT f0_offset
;
271 HOST_WIDE_INT f4_offset
;
272 HOST_WIDE_INT f8_offset
;
273 HOST_WIDE_INT backchain_offset
;
275 /* Number of first and last gpr where slots in the register
276 save area are reserved for. */
277 int first_save_gpr_slot
;
278 int last_save_gpr_slot
;
280 /* Number of first and last gpr to be saved, restored. */
282 int first_restore_gpr
;
284 int last_restore_gpr
;
286 /* Bits standing for floating point registers. Set, if the
287 respective register has to be saved. Starting with reg 16 (f0)
288 at the rightmost bit.
289 Bit 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
290 fpr 15 - 8 7 5 3 1 6 4 2 0
291 reg 31 - 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 */
292 unsigned int fpr_bitmap
;
294 /* Number of floating point registers f8-f15 which must be saved. */
297 /* Set if return address needs to be saved.
298 This flag is set by s390_return_addr_rtx if it could not use
299 the initial value of r14 and therefore depends on r14 saved
301 bool save_return_addr_p
;
303 /* Size of stack frame. */
304 HOST_WIDE_INT frame_size
;
307 /* Define the structure for the machine field in struct function. */
309 struct machine_function
GTY(())
311 struct s390_frame_layout frame_layout
;
313 /* Literal pool base register. */
316 /* True if we may need to perform branch splitting. */
317 bool split_branches_pending_p
;
319 /* Some local-dynamic TLS symbol name. */
320 const char *some_ld_name
;
322 bool has_landing_pad_p
;
325 /* Few accessor macros for struct cfun->machine->s390_frame_layout. */
327 #define cfun_frame_layout (cfun->machine->frame_layout)
328 #define cfun_save_high_fprs_p (!!cfun_frame_layout.high_fprs)
329 #define cfun_gprs_save_area_size ((cfun_frame_layout.last_save_gpr_slot - \
330 cfun_frame_layout.first_save_gpr_slot + 1) * UNITS_PER_WORD)
331 #define cfun_set_fpr_bit(BITNUM) (cfun->machine->frame_layout.fpr_bitmap |= \
333 #define cfun_fpr_bit_p(BITNUM) (!!(cfun->machine->frame_layout.fpr_bitmap & \
336 /* Number of GPRs and FPRs used for argument passing. */
337 #define GP_ARG_NUM_REG 5
338 #define FP_ARG_NUM_REG (TARGET_64BIT? 4 : 2)
340 /* A couple of shortcuts. */
341 #define CONST_OK_FOR_J(x) \
342 CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P((x), 'J', "J")
343 #define CONST_OK_FOR_K(x) \
344 CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P((x), 'K', "K")
345 #define CONST_OK_FOR_Os(x) \
346 CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P((x), 'O', "Os")
347 #define CONST_OK_FOR_Op(x) \
348 CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P((x), 'O', "Op")
349 #define CONST_OK_FOR_On(x) \
350 CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P((x), 'O', "On")
352 #define REGNO_PAIR_OK(REGNO, MODE) \
353 (HARD_REGNO_NREGS ((REGNO), (MODE)) == 1 || !((REGNO) & 1))
355 static enum machine_mode
356 s390_libgcc_cmp_return_mode (void)
358 return TARGET_64BIT
? DImode
: SImode
;
361 static enum machine_mode
362 s390_libgcc_shift_count_mode (void)
364 return TARGET_64BIT
? DImode
: SImode
;
367 /* Return true if the back end supports mode MODE. */
369 s390_scalar_mode_supported_p (enum machine_mode mode
)
371 if (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
))
374 return default_scalar_mode_supported_p (mode
);
377 /* Set the has_landing_pad_p flag in struct machine_function to VALUE. */
380 s390_set_has_landing_pad_p (bool value
)
382 cfun
->machine
->has_landing_pad_p
= value
;
385 /* If two condition code modes are compatible, return a condition code
386 mode which is compatible with both. Otherwise, return
389 static enum machine_mode
390 s390_cc_modes_compatible (enum machine_mode m1
, enum machine_mode m2
)
398 if (m2
== CCUmode
|| m2
== CCTmode
|| m2
== CCZ1mode
399 || m2
== CCSmode
|| m2
== CCSRmode
|| m2
== CCURmode
)
420 /* Return true if SET either doesn't set the CC register, or else
421 the source and destination have matching CC modes and that
422 CC mode is at least as constrained as REQ_MODE. */
425 s390_match_ccmode_set (rtx set
, enum machine_mode req_mode
)
427 enum machine_mode set_mode
;
429 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (set
) == SET
);
431 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set
)) != REG
|| !CC_REGNO_P (REGNO (SET_DEST (set
))))
434 set_mode
= GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
));
448 if (req_mode
!= set_mode
)
453 if (req_mode
!= CCSmode
&& req_mode
!= CCUmode
&& req_mode
!= CCTmode
454 && req_mode
!= CCSRmode
&& req_mode
!= CCURmode
)
460 if (req_mode
!= CCAmode
)
468 return (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (set
)) == set_mode
);
471 /* Return true if every SET in INSN that sets the CC register
472 has source and destination with matching CC modes and that
473 CC mode is at least as constrained as REQ_MODE.
474 If REQ_MODE is VOIDmode, always return false. */
477 s390_match_ccmode (rtx insn
, enum machine_mode req_mode
)
481 /* s390_tm_ccmode returns VOIDmode to indicate failure. */
482 if (req_mode
== VOIDmode
)
485 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
)
486 return s390_match_ccmode_set (PATTERN (insn
), req_mode
);
488 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == PARALLEL
)
489 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn
), 0); i
++)
491 rtx set
= XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, i
);
492 if (GET_CODE (set
) == SET
)
493 if (!s390_match_ccmode_set (set
, req_mode
))
500 /* If a test-under-mask instruction can be used to implement
501 (compare (and ... OP1) OP2), return the CC mode required
502 to do that. Otherwise, return VOIDmode.
503 MIXED is true if the instruction can distinguish between
504 CC1 and CC2 for mixed selected bits (TMxx), it is false
505 if the instruction cannot (TM). */
508 s390_tm_ccmode (rtx op1
, rtx op2
, bool mixed
)
512 /* ??? Fixme: should work on CONST_DOUBLE as well. */
513 if (GET_CODE (op1
) != CONST_INT
|| GET_CODE (op2
) != CONST_INT
)
516 /* Selected bits all zero: CC0.
517 e.g.: int a; if ((a & (16 + 128)) == 0) */
518 if (INTVAL (op2
) == 0)
521 /* Selected bits all one: CC3.
522 e.g.: int a; if ((a & (16 + 128)) == 16 + 128) */
523 if (INTVAL (op2
) == INTVAL (op1
))
526 /* Exactly two bits selected, mixed zeroes and ones: CC1 or CC2. e.g.:
528 if ((a & (16 + 128)) == 16) -> CCT1
529 if ((a & (16 + 128)) == 128) -> CCT2 */
532 bit1
= exact_log2 (INTVAL (op2
));
533 bit0
= exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1
) ^ INTVAL (op2
));
534 if (bit0
!= -1 && bit1
!= -1)
535 return bit0
> bit1
? CCT1mode
: CCT2mode
;
541 /* Given a comparison code OP (EQ, NE, etc.) and the operands
542 OP0 and OP1 of a COMPARE, return the mode to be used for the
546 s390_select_ccmode (enum rtx_code code
, rtx op0
, rtx op1
)
552 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == NEG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ABS
)
553 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
)
555 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == PLUS
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == CONST_INT
556 && CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))))
558 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == MINUS
559 || GET_CODE (op1
) == NEG
)
560 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
)
563 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
)
565 /* Check whether we can potentially do it via TM. */
566 enum machine_mode ccmode
;
567 ccmode
= s390_tm_ccmode (XEXP (op0
, 1), op1
, 1);
568 if (ccmode
!= VOIDmode
)
570 /* Relax CCTmode to CCZmode to allow fall-back to AND
571 if that turns out to be beneficial. */
572 return ccmode
== CCTmode
? CCZmode
: ccmode
;
576 if (register_operand (op0
, HImode
)
577 && GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
578 && (INTVAL (op1
) == -1 || INTVAL (op1
) == 65535))
580 if (register_operand (op0
, QImode
)
581 && GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
582 && (INTVAL (op1
) == -1 || INTVAL (op1
) == 255))
591 /* The only overflow condition of NEG and ABS happens when
592 -INT_MAX is used as parameter, which stays negative. So
593 we have an overflow from a positive value to a negative.
594 Using CCAP mode the resulting cc can be used for comparisons. */
595 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == NEG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ABS
)
596 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
)
599 /* If constants are involved in an add instruction it is possible to use
600 the resulting cc for comparisons with zero. Knowing the sign of the
601 constant the overflow behavior gets predictable. e.g.:
602 int a, b; if ((b = a + c) > 0)
603 with c as a constant value: c < 0 -> CCAN and c >= 0 -> CCAP */
604 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == PLUS
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == CONST_INT
605 && CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))))
607 if (INTVAL (XEXP((op0
), 1)) < 0)
621 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == SIGN_EXTEND
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ZERO_EXTEND
)
622 && GET_CODE (op1
) != CONST_INT
)
628 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == PLUS
629 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
)
632 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == SIGN_EXTEND
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ZERO_EXTEND
)
633 && GET_CODE (op1
) != CONST_INT
)
639 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MINUS
640 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
)
643 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == SIGN_EXTEND
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ZERO_EXTEND
)
644 && GET_CODE (op1
) != CONST_INT
)
653 /* Replace the comparison OP0 CODE OP1 by a semantically equivalent one
654 that we can implement more efficiently. */
657 s390_canonicalize_comparison (enum rtx_code
*code
, rtx
*op0
, rtx
*op1
)
659 /* Convert ZERO_EXTRACT back to AND to enable TM patterns. */
660 if ((*code
== EQ
|| *code
== NE
)
661 && *op1
== const0_rtx
662 && GET_CODE (*op0
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
663 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*op0
, 1)) == CONST_INT
664 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*op0
, 2)) == CONST_INT
665 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (*op0
, 0))))
667 rtx inner
= XEXP (*op0
, 0);
668 HOST_WIDE_INT modesize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner
));
669 HOST_WIDE_INT len
= INTVAL (XEXP (*op0
, 1));
670 HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (*op0
, 2));
672 if (len
> 0 && len
< modesize
673 && pos
>= 0 && pos
+ len
<= modesize
674 && modesize
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
676 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT block
;
677 block
= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << len
) - 1;
678 block
<<= modesize
- pos
- len
;
680 *op0
= gen_rtx_AND (GET_MODE (inner
), inner
,
681 gen_int_mode (block
, GET_MODE (inner
)));
685 /* Narrow AND of memory against immediate to enable TM. */
686 if ((*code
== EQ
|| *code
== NE
)
687 && *op1
== const0_rtx
688 && GET_CODE (*op0
) == AND
689 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*op0
, 1)) == CONST_INT
690 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (*op0
, 0))))
692 rtx inner
= XEXP (*op0
, 0);
693 rtx mask
= XEXP (*op0
, 1);
695 /* Ignore paradoxical SUBREGs if all extra bits are masked out. */
696 if (GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
697 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner
)))
698 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner
))
699 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner
))))
701 & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (inner
))
702 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner
))))
704 inner
= SUBREG_REG (inner
);
706 /* Do not change volatile MEMs. */
707 if (MEM_P (inner
) && !MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner
))
709 int part
= s390_single_part (XEXP (*op0
, 1),
710 GET_MODE (inner
), QImode
, 0);
713 mask
= gen_int_mode (s390_extract_part (mask
, QImode
, 0), QImode
);
714 inner
= adjust_address_nv (inner
, QImode
, part
);
715 *op0
= gen_rtx_AND (QImode
, inner
, mask
);
720 /* Narrow comparisons against 0xffff to HImode if possible. */
721 if ((*code
== EQ
|| *code
== NE
)
722 && GET_CODE (*op1
) == CONST_INT
723 && INTVAL (*op1
) == 0xffff
724 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (*op0
))
725 && (nonzero_bits (*op0
, GET_MODE (*op0
))
726 & ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) 0xffff) == 0)
728 *op0
= gen_lowpart (HImode
, *op0
);
732 /* Remove redundant UNSPEC_CCU_TO_INT conversions if possible. */
733 if (GET_CODE (*op0
) == UNSPEC
734 && XINT (*op0
, 1) == UNSPEC_CCU_TO_INT
735 && XVECLEN (*op0
, 0) == 1
736 && GET_MODE (XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0)) == CCUmode
737 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0)) == REG
738 && REGNO (XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0)) == CC_REGNUM
739 && *op1
== const0_rtx
)
741 enum rtx_code new_code
= UNKNOWN
;
744 case EQ
: new_code
= EQ
; break;
745 case NE
: new_code
= NE
; break;
746 case LT
: new_code
= GTU
; break;
747 case GT
: new_code
= LTU
; break;
748 case LE
: new_code
= GEU
; break;
749 case GE
: new_code
= LEU
; break;
753 if (new_code
!= UNKNOWN
)
755 *op0
= XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0);
760 /* Remove redundant UNSPEC_CCZ_TO_INT conversions if possible. */
761 if (GET_CODE (*op0
) == UNSPEC
762 && XINT (*op0
, 1) == UNSPEC_CCZ_TO_INT
763 && XVECLEN (*op0
, 0) == 1
764 && GET_MODE (XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0)) == CCZmode
765 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0)) == REG
766 && REGNO (XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0)) == CC_REGNUM
767 && *op1
== const0_rtx
)
769 enum rtx_code new_code
= UNKNOWN
;
772 case EQ
: new_code
= EQ
; break;
773 case NE
: new_code
= NE
; break;
777 if (new_code
!= UNKNOWN
)
779 *op0
= XVECEXP (*op0
, 0, 0);
784 /* Simplify cascaded EQ, NE with const0_rtx. */
785 if ((*code
== NE
|| *code
== EQ
)
786 && (GET_CODE (*op0
) == EQ
|| GET_CODE (*op0
) == NE
)
787 && GET_MODE (*op0
) == SImode
788 && GET_MODE (XEXP (*op0
, 0)) == CCZ1mode
789 && REG_P (XEXP (*op0
, 0))
790 && XEXP (*op0
, 1) == const0_rtx
791 && *op1
== const0_rtx
)
793 if ((*code
== EQ
&& GET_CODE (*op0
) == NE
)
794 || (*code
== NE
&& GET_CODE (*op0
) == EQ
))
798 *op0
= XEXP (*op0
, 0);
801 /* Prefer register over memory as first operand. */
802 if (MEM_P (*op0
) && REG_P (*op1
))
804 rtx tem
= *op0
; *op0
= *op1
; *op1
= tem
;
805 *code
= swap_condition (*code
);
809 /* Emit a compare instruction suitable to implement the comparison
810 OP0 CODE OP1. Return the correct condition RTL to be placed in
811 the IF_THEN_ELSE of the conditional branch testing the result. */
814 s390_emit_compare (enum rtx_code code
, rtx op0
, rtx op1
)
816 enum machine_mode mode
= s390_select_ccmode (code
, op0
, op1
);
819 /* Do not output a redundant compare instruction if a compare_and_swap
820 pattern already computed the result and the machine modes are compatible. */
821 if (s390_compare_emitted
822 && (s390_cc_modes_compatible (GET_MODE (s390_compare_emitted
), mode
)
823 == GET_MODE (s390_compare_emitted
)))
824 ret
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, VOIDmode
, s390_compare_emitted
, const0_rtx
);
827 rtx cc
= gen_rtx_REG (mode
, CC_REGNUM
);
829 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, cc
, gen_rtx_COMPARE (mode
, op0
, op1
)));
830 ret
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, VOIDmode
, cc
, const0_rtx
);
832 s390_compare_emitted
= NULL_RTX
;
836 /* Emit a SImode compare and swap instruction setting MEM to NEW_RTX if OLD
838 Return the correct condition RTL to be placed in the IF_THEN_ELSE of the
839 conditional branch testing the result. */
842 s390_emit_compare_and_swap (enum rtx_code code
, rtx old
, rtx mem
, rtx cmp
, rtx new_rtx
)
846 emit_insn (gen_sync_compare_and_swap_ccsi (old
, mem
, cmp
, new_rtx
));
847 ret
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, VOIDmode
, s390_compare_emitted
, const0_rtx
);
849 s390_compare_emitted
= NULL_RTX
;
854 /* Emit a jump instruction to TARGET. If COND is NULL_RTX, emit an
855 unconditional jump, else a conditional jump under condition COND. */
858 s390_emit_jump (rtx target
, rtx cond
)
862 target
= gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode
, target
);
864 target
= gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode
, cond
, target
, pc_rtx
);
866 insn
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, pc_rtx
, target
);
867 emit_jump_insn (insn
);
870 /* Return branch condition mask to implement a branch
871 specified by CODE. Return -1 for invalid comparisons. */
874 s390_branch_condition_mask (rtx code
)
876 const int CC0
= 1 << 3;
877 const int CC1
= 1 << 2;
878 const int CC2
= 1 << 1;
879 const int CC3
= 1 << 0;
881 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (XEXP (code
, 0)) == REG
);
882 gcc_assert (REGNO (XEXP (code
, 0)) == CC_REGNUM
);
883 gcc_assert (XEXP (code
, 1) == const0_rtx
);
885 switch (GET_MODE (XEXP (code
, 0)))
889 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
892 case NE
: return CC1
| CC2
| CC3
;
898 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
901 case NE
: return CC0
| CC2
| CC3
;
907 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
910 case NE
: return CC0
| CC1
| CC3
;
916 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
919 case NE
: return CC0
| CC1
| CC2
;
925 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
927 case EQ
: return CC0
| CC2
;
928 case NE
: return CC1
| CC3
;
934 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
936 case LTU
: return CC2
| CC3
; /* carry */
937 case GEU
: return CC0
| CC1
; /* no carry */
943 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
945 case GTU
: return CC0
| CC1
; /* borrow */
946 case LEU
: return CC2
| CC3
; /* no borrow */
952 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
954 case EQ
: return CC0
| CC2
;
955 case NE
: return CC1
| CC3
;
956 case LTU
: return CC1
;
957 case GTU
: return CC3
;
958 case LEU
: return CC1
| CC2
;
959 case GEU
: return CC2
| CC3
;
964 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
967 case NE
: return CC1
| CC2
| CC3
;
968 case LTU
: return CC1
;
969 case GTU
: return CC2
;
970 case LEU
: return CC0
| CC1
;
971 case GEU
: return CC0
| CC2
;
977 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
980 case NE
: return CC2
| CC1
| CC3
;
981 case LTU
: return CC2
;
982 case GTU
: return CC1
;
983 case LEU
: return CC0
| CC2
;
984 case GEU
: return CC0
| CC1
;
990 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
993 case NE
: return CC1
| CC2
| CC3
;
994 case LT
: return CC1
| CC3
;
996 case LE
: return CC0
| CC1
| CC3
;
997 case GE
: return CC0
| CC2
;
1003 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
1005 case EQ
: return CC0
;
1006 case NE
: return CC1
| CC2
| CC3
;
1007 case LT
: return CC1
;
1008 case GT
: return CC2
| CC3
;
1009 case LE
: return CC0
| CC1
;
1010 case GE
: return CC0
| CC2
| CC3
;
1016 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
1018 case EQ
: return CC0
;
1019 case NE
: return CC1
| CC2
| CC3
;
1020 case LT
: return CC1
;
1021 case GT
: return CC2
;
1022 case LE
: return CC0
| CC1
;
1023 case GE
: return CC0
| CC2
;
1024 case UNORDERED
: return CC3
;
1025 case ORDERED
: return CC0
| CC1
| CC2
;
1026 case UNEQ
: return CC0
| CC3
;
1027 case UNLT
: return CC1
| CC3
;
1028 case UNGT
: return CC2
| CC3
;
1029 case UNLE
: return CC0
| CC1
| CC3
;
1030 case UNGE
: return CC0
| CC2
| CC3
;
1031 case LTGT
: return CC1
| CC2
;
1037 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
1039 case EQ
: return CC0
;
1040 case NE
: return CC2
| CC1
| CC3
;
1041 case LT
: return CC2
;
1042 case GT
: return CC1
;
1043 case LE
: return CC0
| CC2
;
1044 case GE
: return CC0
| CC1
;
1045 case UNORDERED
: return CC3
;
1046 case ORDERED
: return CC0
| CC2
| CC1
;
1047 case UNEQ
: return CC0
| CC3
;
1048 case UNLT
: return CC2
| CC3
;
1049 case UNGT
: return CC1
| CC3
;
1050 case UNLE
: return CC0
| CC2
| CC3
;
1051 case UNGE
: return CC0
| CC1
| CC3
;
1052 case LTGT
: return CC2
| CC1
;
1063 /* Return branch condition mask to implement a compare and branch
1064 specified by CODE. Return -1 for invalid comparisons. */
1067 s390_compare_and_branch_condition_mask (rtx code
)
1069 const int CC0
= 1 << 3;
1070 const int CC1
= 1 << 2;
1071 const int CC2
= 1 << 1;
1073 switch (GET_CODE (code
))
1097 /* If INV is false, return assembler mnemonic string to implement
1098 a branch specified by CODE. If INV is true, return mnemonic
1099 for the corresponding inverted branch. */
1102 s390_branch_condition_mnemonic (rtx code
, int inv
)
1106 static const char *const mnemonic
[16] =
1108 NULL
, "o", "h", "nle",
1109 "l", "nhe", "lh", "ne",
1110 "e", "nlh", "he", "nl",
1111 "le", "nh", "no", NULL
1114 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (code
, 0)) == REG
1115 && REGNO (XEXP (code
, 0)) == CC_REGNUM
1116 && XEXP (code
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
1117 mask
= s390_branch_condition_mask (code
);
1119 mask
= s390_compare_and_branch_condition_mask (code
);
1121 gcc_assert (mask
>= 0);
1126 gcc_assert (mask
>= 1 && mask
<= 14);
1128 return mnemonic
[mask
];
1131 /* Return the part of op which has a value different from def.
1132 The size of the part is determined by mode.
1133 Use this function only if you already know that op really
1134 contains such a part. */
1136 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1137 s390_extract_part (rtx op
, enum machine_mode mode
, int def
)
1139 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT value
= 0;
1140 int max_parts
= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
/ GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
1141 int part_bits
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
1142 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT part_mask
1143 = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)1 << part_bits
) - 1;
1146 for (i
= 0; i
< max_parts
; i
++)
1149 value
= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (op
);
1151 value
>>= part_bits
;
1153 if ((value
& part_mask
) != (def
& part_mask
))
1154 return value
& part_mask
;
1160 /* If OP is an integer constant of mode MODE with exactly one
1161 part of mode PART_MODE unequal to DEF, return the number of that
1162 part. Otherwise, return -1. */
1165 s390_single_part (rtx op
,
1166 enum machine_mode mode
,
1167 enum machine_mode part_mode
,
1170 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT value
= 0;
1171 int n_parts
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / GET_MODE_SIZE (part_mode
);
1172 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT part_mask
1173 = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (part_mode
)) - 1;
1176 if (GET_CODE (op
) != CONST_INT
)
1179 for (i
= 0; i
< n_parts
; i
++)
1182 value
= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (op
);
1184 value
>>= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (part_mode
);
1186 if ((value
& part_mask
) != (def
& part_mask
))
1194 return part
== -1 ? -1 : n_parts
- 1 - part
;
1197 /* Return true if IN contains a contiguous bitfield in the lower SIZE
1198 bits and no other bits are set in IN. POS and LENGTH can be used
1199 to obtain the start position and the length of the bitfield.
1201 POS gives the position of the first bit of the bitfield counting
1202 from the lowest order bit starting with zero. In order to use this
1203 value for S/390 instructions this has to be converted to "bits big
1207 s390_contiguous_bitmask_p (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT in
, int size
,
1208 int *pos
, int *length
)
1213 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= 1ULL;
1214 bool contiguous
= false;
1216 for (i
= 0; i
< size
; mask
<<= 1, i
++)
1240 /* Calculate a mask for all bits beyond the contiguous bits. */
1241 mask
= (-1LL & ~(((1ULL << (tmp_length
+ tmp_pos
- 1)) << 1) - 1));
1246 if (tmp_length
+ tmp_pos
- 1 > size
)
1250 *length
= tmp_length
;
1258 /* Check whether we can (and want to) split a double-word
1259 move in mode MODE from SRC to DST into two single-word
1260 moves, moving the subword FIRST_SUBWORD first. */
1263 s390_split_ok_p (rtx dst
, rtx src
, enum machine_mode mode
, int first_subword
)
1265 /* Floating point registers cannot be split. */
1266 if (FP_REG_P (src
) || FP_REG_P (dst
))
1269 /* We don't need to split if operands are directly accessible. */
1270 if (s_operand (src
, mode
) || s_operand (dst
, mode
))
1273 /* Non-offsettable memory references cannot be split. */
1274 if ((GET_CODE (src
) == MEM
&& !offsettable_memref_p (src
))
1275 || (GET_CODE (dst
) == MEM
&& !offsettable_memref_p (dst
)))
1278 /* Moving the first subword must not clobber a register
1279 needed to move the second subword. */
1280 if (register_operand (dst
, mode
))
1282 rtx subreg
= operand_subword (dst
, first_subword
, 0, mode
);
1283 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (subreg
, src
))
1290 /* Return true if it can be proven that [MEM1, MEM1 + SIZE]
1291 and [MEM2, MEM2 + SIZE] do overlap and false
1295 s390_overlap_p (rtx mem1
, rtx mem2
, HOST_WIDE_INT size
)
1297 rtx addr1
, addr2
, addr_delta
;
1298 HOST_WIDE_INT delta
;
1300 if (GET_CODE (mem1
) != MEM
|| GET_CODE (mem2
) != MEM
)
1306 addr1
= XEXP (mem1
, 0);
1307 addr2
= XEXP (mem2
, 0);
1309 addr_delta
= simplify_binary_operation (MINUS
, Pmode
, addr2
, addr1
);
1311 /* This overlapping check is used by peepholes merging memory block operations.
1312 Overlapping operations would otherwise be recognized by the S/390 hardware
1313 and would fall back to a slower implementation. Allowing overlapping
1314 operations would lead to slow code but not to wrong code. Therefore we are
1315 somewhat optimistic if we cannot prove that the memory blocks are
1317 That's why we return false here although this may accept operations on
1318 overlapping memory areas. */
1319 if (!addr_delta
|| GET_CODE (addr_delta
) != CONST_INT
)
1322 delta
= INTVAL (addr_delta
);
1325 || (delta
> 0 && delta
< size
)
1326 || (delta
< 0 && -delta
< size
))
1332 /* Check whether the address of memory reference MEM2 equals exactly
1333 the address of memory reference MEM1 plus DELTA. Return true if
1334 we can prove this to be the case, false otherwise. */
1337 s390_offset_p (rtx mem1
, rtx mem2
, rtx delta
)
1339 rtx addr1
, addr2
, addr_delta
;
1341 if (GET_CODE (mem1
) != MEM
|| GET_CODE (mem2
) != MEM
)
1344 addr1
= XEXP (mem1
, 0);
1345 addr2
= XEXP (mem2
, 0);
1347 addr_delta
= simplify_binary_operation (MINUS
, Pmode
, addr2
, addr1
);
1348 if (!addr_delta
|| !rtx_equal_p (addr_delta
, delta
))
1354 /* Expand logical operator CODE in mode MODE with operands OPERANDS. */
1357 s390_expand_logical_operator (enum rtx_code code
, enum machine_mode mode
,
1360 enum machine_mode wmode
= mode
;
1361 rtx dst
= operands
[0];
1362 rtx src1
= operands
[1];
1363 rtx src2
= operands
[2];
1366 /* If we cannot handle the operation directly, use a temp register. */
1367 if (!s390_logical_operator_ok_p (operands
))
1368 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1370 /* QImode and HImode patterns make sense only if we have a destination
1371 in memory. Otherwise perform the operation in SImode. */
1372 if ((mode
== QImode
|| mode
== HImode
) && GET_CODE (dst
) != MEM
)
1375 /* Widen operands if required. */
1378 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == SUBREG
1379 && (tem
= simplify_subreg (wmode
, dst
, mode
, 0)) != 0)
1381 else if (REG_P (dst
))
1382 dst
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (wmode
, dst
, 0);
1384 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (wmode
);
1386 if (GET_CODE (src1
) == SUBREG
1387 && (tem
= simplify_subreg (wmode
, src1
, mode
, 0)) != 0)
1389 else if (GET_MODE (src1
) != VOIDmode
)
1390 src1
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (wmode
, force_reg (mode
, src1
), 0);
1392 if (GET_CODE (src2
) == SUBREG
1393 && (tem
= simplify_subreg (wmode
, src2
, mode
, 0)) != 0)
1395 else if (GET_MODE (src2
) != VOIDmode
)
1396 src2
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (wmode
, force_reg (mode
, src2
), 0);
1399 /* Emit the instruction. */
1400 op
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, dst
, gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, wmode
, src1
, src2
));
1401 clob
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_REG (CCmode
, CC_REGNUM
));
1402 emit_insn (gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, gen_rtvec (2, op
, clob
)));
1404 /* Fix up the destination if needed. */
1405 if (dst
!= operands
[0])
1406 emit_move_insn (operands
[0], gen_lowpart (mode
, dst
));
1409 /* Check whether OPERANDS are OK for a logical operation (AND, IOR, XOR). */
1412 s390_logical_operator_ok_p (rtx
*operands
)
1414 /* If the destination operand is in memory, it needs to coincide
1415 with one of the source operands. After reload, it has to be
1416 the first source operand. */
1417 if (GET_CODE (operands
[0]) == MEM
)
1418 return rtx_equal_p (operands
[0], operands
[1])
1419 || (!reload_completed
&& rtx_equal_p (operands
[0], operands
[2]));
1424 /* Narrow logical operation CODE of memory operand MEMOP with immediate
1425 operand IMMOP to switch from SS to SI type instructions. */
1428 s390_narrow_logical_operator (enum rtx_code code
, rtx
*memop
, rtx
*immop
)
1430 int def
= code
== AND
? -1 : 0;
1434 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (*memop
) == MEM
);
1435 gcc_assert (!MEM_VOLATILE_P (*memop
));
1437 mask
= s390_extract_part (*immop
, QImode
, def
);
1438 part
= s390_single_part (*immop
, GET_MODE (*memop
), QImode
, def
);
1439 gcc_assert (part
>= 0);
1441 *memop
= adjust_address (*memop
, QImode
, part
);
1442 *immop
= gen_int_mode (mask
, QImode
);
1446 /* How to allocate a 'struct machine_function'. */
1448 static struct machine_function
*
1449 s390_init_machine_status (void)
1451 return GGC_CNEW (struct machine_function
);
1454 /* Change optimizations to be performed, depending on the
1457 LEVEL is the optimization level specified; 2 if `-O2' is
1458 specified, 1 if `-O' is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
1460 SIZE is nonzero if `-Os' is specified and zero otherwise. */
1463 optimization_options (int level ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, int size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
1465 /* ??? There are apparently still problems with -fcaller-saves. */
1466 flag_caller_saves
= 0;
1468 /* By default, always emit DWARF-2 unwind info. This allows debugging
1469 without maintaining a stack frame back-chain. */
1470 flag_asynchronous_unwind_tables
= 1;
1472 /* Use MVCLE instructions to decrease code size if requested. */
1474 target_flags
|= MASK_MVCLE
;
1477 /* Return true if ARG is the name of a processor. Set *TYPE and *FLAGS
1478 to the associated processor_type and processor_flags if so. */
1481 s390_handle_arch_option (const char *arg
,
1482 enum processor_type
*type
,
1483 enum processor_flags
*flags
)
1487 const char *const name
; /* processor name or nickname. */
1488 const enum processor_type processor
;
1489 const enum processor_flags flags
;
1491 const processor_alias_table
[] =
1493 {"g5", PROCESSOR_9672_G5
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
},
1494 {"g6", PROCESSOR_9672_G6
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
},
1495 {"z900", PROCESSOR_2064_Z900
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
| PF_ZARCH
},
1496 {"z990", PROCESSOR_2084_Z990
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
| PF_ZARCH
1497 | PF_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
},
1498 {"z9-109", PROCESSOR_2094_Z9_109
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
| PF_ZARCH
1499 | PF_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
| PF_EXTIMM
},
1500 {"z9-ec", PROCESSOR_2094_Z9_109
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
| PF_ZARCH
1501 | PF_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
| PF_EXTIMM
| PF_DFP
},
1502 {"z10", PROCESSOR_2097_Z10
, PF_IEEE_FLOAT
| PF_ZARCH
1503 | PF_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
| PF_EXTIMM
| PF_DFP
| PF_Z10
},
1507 for (i
= 0; i
< ARRAY_SIZE (processor_alias_table
); i
++)
1508 if (strcmp (arg
, processor_alias_table
[i
].name
) == 0)
1510 *type
= processor_alias_table
[i
].processor
;
1511 *flags
= processor_alias_table
[i
].flags
;
1517 /* Implement TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION. */
1520 s390_handle_option (size_t code
, const char *arg
, int value ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
1525 return s390_handle_arch_option (arg
, &s390_arch
, &s390_arch_flags
);
1527 case OPT_mstack_guard_
:
1528 if (sscanf (arg
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, &s390_stack_guard
) != 1)
1530 if (exact_log2 (s390_stack_guard
) == -1)
1531 error ("stack guard value must be an exact power of 2");
1534 case OPT_mstack_size_
:
1535 if (sscanf (arg
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, &s390_stack_size
) != 1)
1537 if (exact_log2 (s390_stack_size
) == -1)
1538 error ("stack size must be an exact power of 2");
1542 return s390_handle_arch_option (arg
, &s390_tune
, &s390_tune_flags
);
1544 case OPT_mwarn_framesize_
:
1545 return sscanf (arg
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, &s390_warn_framesize
) == 1;
1553 override_options (void)
1555 /* Set up function hooks. */
1556 init_machine_status
= s390_init_machine_status
;
1558 /* Architecture mode defaults according to ABI. */
1559 if (!(target_flags_explicit
& MASK_ZARCH
))
1562 target_flags
|= MASK_ZARCH
;
1564 target_flags
&= ~MASK_ZARCH
;
1567 /* Determine processor architectural level. */
1568 if (!s390_arch_string
)
1570 s390_arch_string
= TARGET_ZARCH
? "z900" : "g5";
1571 s390_handle_arch_option (s390_arch_string
, &s390_arch
, &s390_arch_flags
);
1574 /* Determine processor to tune for. */
1575 if (s390_tune
== PROCESSOR_max
)
1577 s390_tune
= s390_arch
;
1578 s390_tune_flags
= s390_arch_flags
;
1581 /* Sanity checks. */
1582 if (TARGET_ZARCH
&& !TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
1583 error ("z/Architecture mode not supported on %s", s390_arch_string
);
1584 if (TARGET_64BIT
&& !TARGET_ZARCH
)
1585 error ("64-bit ABI not supported in ESA/390 mode");
1587 if (TARGET_HARD_DFP
&& !TARGET_DFP
)
1589 if (target_flags_explicit
& MASK_HARD_DFP
)
1591 if (!TARGET_CPU_DFP
)
1592 error ("Hardware decimal floating point instructions"
1593 " not available on %s", s390_arch_string
);
1595 error ("Hardware decimal floating point instructions"
1596 " not available in ESA/390 mode");
1599 target_flags
&= ~MASK_HARD_DFP
;
1602 if ((target_flags_explicit
& MASK_SOFT_FLOAT
) && TARGET_SOFT_FLOAT
)
1604 if ((target_flags_explicit
& MASK_HARD_DFP
) && TARGET_HARD_DFP
)
1605 error ("-mhard-dfp can't be used in conjunction with -msoft-float");
1607 target_flags
&= ~MASK_HARD_DFP
;
1610 /* Set processor cost function. */
1613 case PROCESSOR_2084_Z990
:
1614 s390_cost
= &z990_cost
;
1616 case PROCESSOR_2094_Z9_109
:
1617 s390_cost
= &z9_109_cost
;
1619 case PROCESSOR_2097_Z10
:
1620 s390_cost
= &z10_cost
;
1623 s390_cost
= &z900_cost
;
1626 if (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
&& TARGET_PACKED_STACK
&& TARGET_HARD_FLOAT
)
1627 error ("-mbackchain -mpacked-stack -mhard-float are not supported "
1630 if (s390_stack_size
)
1632 if (s390_stack_guard
>= s390_stack_size
)
1633 error ("stack size must be greater than the stack guard value");
1634 else if (s390_stack_size
> 1 << 16)
1635 error ("stack size must not be greater than 64k");
1637 else if (s390_stack_guard
)
1638 error ("-mstack-guard implies use of -mstack-size");
1640 #ifdef TARGET_DEFAULT_LONG_DOUBLE_128
1641 if (!(target_flags_explicit
& MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128
))
1642 target_flags
|= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128
;
1646 /* Map for smallest class containing reg regno. */
1648 const enum reg_class regclass_map
[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
] =
1649 { GENERAL_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
,
1650 ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
,
1651 ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
,
1652 ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
,
1653 FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
,
1654 FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
,
1655 FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
,
1656 FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
, FP_REGS
,
1657 ADDR_REGS
, CC_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
, ADDR_REGS
,
1658 ACCESS_REGS
, ACCESS_REGS
1661 /* Return attribute type of insn. */
1663 static enum attr_type
1664 s390_safe_attr_type (rtx insn
)
1666 if (recog_memoized (insn
) >= 0)
1667 return get_attr_type (insn
);
1672 /* Return true if DISP is a valid short displacement. */
1675 s390_short_displacement (rtx disp
)
1677 /* No displacement is OK. */
1681 /* Integer displacement in range. */
1682 if (GET_CODE (disp
) == CONST_INT
)
1683 return INTVAL (disp
) >= 0 && INTVAL (disp
) < 4096;
1685 /* GOT offset is not OK, the GOT can be large. */
1686 if (GET_CODE (disp
) == CONST
1687 && GET_CODE (XEXP (disp
, 0)) == UNSPEC
1688 && (XINT (XEXP (disp
, 0), 1) == UNSPEC_GOT
1689 || XINT (XEXP (disp
, 0), 1) == UNSPEC_GOTNTPOFF
))
1692 /* All other symbolic constants are literal pool references,
1693 which are OK as the literal pool must be small. */
1694 if (GET_CODE (disp
) == CONST
)
1700 /* Decompose a RTL expression ADDR for a memory address into
1701 its components, returned in OUT.
1703 Returns false if ADDR is not a valid memory address, true
1704 otherwise. If OUT is NULL, don't return the components,
1705 but check for validity only.
1707 Note: Only addresses in canonical form are recognized.
1708 LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS should convert non-canonical forms to the
1709 canonical form so that they will be recognized. */
1712 s390_decompose_address (rtx addr
, struct s390_address
*out
)
1714 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= 0;
1715 rtx base
= NULL_RTX
;
1716 rtx indx
= NULL_RTX
;
1717 rtx disp
= NULL_RTX
;
1719 bool pointer
= false;
1720 bool base_ptr
= false;
1721 bool indx_ptr
= false;
1722 bool literal_pool
= false;
1724 /* We may need to substitute the literal pool base register into the address
1725 below. However, at this point we do not know which register is going to
1726 be used as base, so we substitute the arg pointer register. This is going
1727 to be treated as holding a pointer below -- it shouldn't be used for any
1729 rtx fake_pool_base
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
);
1731 /* Decompose address into base + index + displacement. */
1733 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (addr
) == UNSPEC
)
1736 else if (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
)
1738 rtx op0
= XEXP (addr
, 0);
1739 rtx op1
= XEXP (addr
, 1);
1740 enum rtx_code code0
= GET_CODE (op0
);
1741 enum rtx_code code1
= GET_CODE (op1
);
1743 if (code0
== REG
|| code0
== UNSPEC
)
1745 if (code1
== REG
|| code1
== UNSPEC
)
1747 indx
= op0
; /* index + base */
1753 base
= op0
; /* base + displacement */
1758 else if (code0
== PLUS
)
1760 indx
= XEXP (op0
, 0); /* index + base + disp */
1761 base
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
1772 disp
= addr
; /* displacement */
1774 /* Extract integer part of displacement. */
1778 if (GET_CODE (disp
) == CONST_INT
)
1780 offset
= INTVAL (disp
);
1783 else if (GET_CODE (disp
) == CONST
1784 && GET_CODE (XEXP (disp
, 0)) == PLUS
1785 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (disp
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
)
1787 offset
= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (disp
, 0), 1));
1788 disp
= XEXP (XEXP (disp
, 0), 0);
1792 /* Strip off CONST here to avoid special case tests later. */
1793 if (disp
&& GET_CODE (disp
) == CONST
)
1794 disp
= XEXP (disp
, 0);
1796 /* We can convert literal pool addresses to
1797 displacements by basing them off the base register. */
1798 if (disp
&& GET_CODE (disp
) == SYMBOL_REF
&& CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (disp
))
1800 /* Either base or index must be free to hold the base register. */
1802 base
= fake_pool_base
, literal_pool
= true;
1804 indx
= fake_pool_base
, literal_pool
= true;
1808 /* Mark up the displacement. */
1809 disp
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, disp
),
1810 UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
);
1813 /* Validate base register. */
1816 if (GET_CODE (base
) == UNSPEC
)
1817 switch (XINT (base
, 1))
1821 disp
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
,
1822 gen_rtvec (1, XVECEXP (base
, 0, 0)),
1823 UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
);
1827 base
= XVECEXP (base
, 0, 1);
1830 case UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE
:
1831 if (XVECLEN (base
, 0) == 1)
1832 base
= fake_pool_base
, literal_pool
= true;
1834 base
= XVECEXP (base
, 0, 1);
1842 || (GET_MODE (base
) != SImode
1843 && GET_MODE (base
) != Pmode
))
1846 if (REGNO (base
) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
1847 || REGNO (base
) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1848 || ((reload_completed
|| reload_in_progress
)
1849 && frame_pointer_needed
1850 && REGNO (base
) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
1851 || REGNO (base
) == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1853 && REGNO (base
) == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
))
1854 pointer
= base_ptr
= true;
1856 if ((reload_completed
|| reload_in_progress
)
1857 && base
== cfun
->machine
->base_reg
)
1858 pointer
= base_ptr
= literal_pool
= true;
1861 /* Validate index register. */
1864 if (GET_CODE (indx
) == UNSPEC
)
1865 switch (XINT (indx
, 1))
1869 disp
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
,
1870 gen_rtvec (1, XVECEXP (indx
, 0, 0)),
1871 UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
);
1875 indx
= XVECEXP (indx
, 0, 1);
1878 case UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE
:
1879 if (XVECLEN (indx
, 0) == 1)
1880 indx
= fake_pool_base
, literal_pool
= true;
1882 indx
= XVECEXP (indx
, 0, 1);
1890 || (GET_MODE (indx
) != SImode
1891 && GET_MODE (indx
) != Pmode
))
1894 if (REGNO (indx
) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
1895 || REGNO (indx
) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1896 || ((reload_completed
|| reload_in_progress
)
1897 && frame_pointer_needed
1898 && REGNO (indx
) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
1899 || REGNO (indx
) == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1901 && REGNO (indx
) == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
))
1902 pointer
= indx_ptr
= true;
1904 if ((reload_completed
|| reload_in_progress
)
1905 && indx
== cfun
->machine
->base_reg
)
1906 pointer
= indx_ptr
= literal_pool
= true;
1909 /* Prefer to use pointer as base, not index. */
1910 if (base
&& indx
&& !base_ptr
1911 && (indx_ptr
|| (!REG_POINTER (base
) && REG_POINTER (indx
))))
1918 /* Validate displacement. */
1921 /* If virtual registers are involved, the displacement will change later
1922 anyway as the virtual registers get eliminated. This could make a
1923 valid displacement invalid, but it is more likely to make an invalid
1924 displacement valid, because we sometimes access the register save area
1925 via negative offsets to one of those registers.
1926 Thus we don't check the displacement for validity here. If after
1927 elimination the displacement turns out to be invalid after all,
1928 this is fixed up by reload in any case. */
1929 if (base
!= arg_pointer_rtx
1930 && indx
!= arg_pointer_rtx
1931 && base
!= return_address_pointer_rtx
1932 && indx
!= return_address_pointer_rtx
1933 && base
!= frame_pointer_rtx
1934 && indx
!= frame_pointer_rtx
1935 && base
!= virtual_stack_vars_rtx
1936 && indx
!= virtual_stack_vars_rtx
)
1937 if (!DISP_IN_RANGE (offset
))
1942 /* All the special cases are pointers. */
1945 /* In the small-PIC case, the linker converts @GOT
1946 and @GOTNTPOFF offsets to possible displacements. */
1947 if (GET_CODE (disp
) == UNSPEC
1948 && (XINT (disp
, 1) == UNSPEC_GOT
1949 || XINT (disp
, 1) == UNSPEC_GOTNTPOFF
)
1955 /* Accept pool label offsets. */
1956 else if (GET_CODE (disp
) == UNSPEC
1957 && XINT (disp
, 1) == UNSPEC_POOL_OFFSET
)
1960 /* Accept literal pool references. */
1961 else if (GET_CODE (disp
) == UNSPEC
1962 && XINT (disp
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
)
1964 orig_disp
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, disp
);
1967 /* If we have an offset, make sure it does not
1968 exceed the size of the constant pool entry. */
1969 rtx sym
= XVECEXP (disp
, 0, 0);
1970 if (offset
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (get_pool_mode (sym
)))
1973 orig_disp
= plus_constant (orig_disp
, offset
);
1988 out
->disp
= orig_disp
;
1989 out
->pointer
= pointer
;
1990 out
->literal_pool
= literal_pool
;
1996 /* Decompose a RTL expression OP for a shift count into its components,
1997 and return the base register in BASE and the offset in OFFSET.
1999 Return true if OP is a valid shift count, false if not. */
2002 s390_decompose_shift_count (rtx op
, rtx
*base
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*offset
)
2004 HOST_WIDE_INT off
= 0;
2006 /* We can have an integer constant, an address register,
2007 or a sum of the two. */
2008 if (GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_INT
)
2013 if (op
&& GET_CODE (op
) == PLUS
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op
, 1)) == CONST_INT
)
2015 off
= INTVAL (XEXP (op
, 1));
2018 while (op
&& GET_CODE (op
) == SUBREG
)
2019 op
= SUBREG_REG (op
);
2021 if (op
&& GET_CODE (op
) != REG
)
2033 /* Return true if CODE is a valid address without index. */
2036 s390_legitimate_address_without_index_p (rtx op
)
2038 struct s390_address addr
;
2040 if (!s390_decompose_address (XEXP (op
, 0), &addr
))
2049 /* Evaluates constraint strings described by the regular expression
2050 ([A|B](Q|R|S|T))|U|W and returns 1 if OP is a valid operand for the
2051 constraint given in STR, or 0 else. */
2054 s390_mem_constraint (const char *str
, rtx op
)
2056 struct s390_address addr
;
2059 /* Check for offsettable variants of memory constraints. */
2062 /* Only accept non-volatile MEMs. */
2063 if (!MEM_P (op
) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (op
))
2066 if ((reload_completed
|| reload_in_progress
)
2067 ? !offsettable_memref_p (op
) : !offsettable_nonstrict_memref_p (op
))
2073 /* Check for non-literal-pool variants of memory constraints. */
2076 if (GET_CODE (op
) != MEM
)
2078 if (!s390_decompose_address (XEXP (op
, 0), &addr
))
2080 if (addr
.literal_pool
)
2089 if (GET_CODE (op
) != MEM
)
2091 if (!s390_decompose_address (XEXP (op
, 0), &addr
))
2096 if (TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
2098 if (!s390_short_displacement (addr
.disp
))
2104 if (GET_CODE (op
) != MEM
)
2107 if (TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
2109 if (!s390_decompose_address (XEXP (op
, 0), &addr
))
2111 if (!s390_short_displacement (addr
.disp
))
2117 if (!TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
2119 if (GET_CODE (op
) != MEM
)
2121 if (!s390_decompose_address (XEXP (op
, 0), &addr
))
2125 if (s390_short_displacement (addr
.disp
))
2130 if (!TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
2132 if (GET_CODE (op
) != MEM
)
2134 if (!s390_decompose_address (XEXP (op
, 0), &addr
))
2136 if (s390_short_displacement (addr
.disp
))
2141 if (TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
2143 if (!s390_decompose_address (op
, &addr
))
2145 if (!s390_short_displacement (addr
.disp
))
2151 if (!TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
2153 if (!s390_decompose_address (op
, &addr
))
2155 if (s390_short_displacement (addr
.disp
))
2160 /* Simply check for the basic form of a shift count. Reload will
2161 take care of making sure we have a proper base register. */
2162 if (!s390_decompose_shift_count (op
, NULL
, NULL
))
2175 /* Evaluates constraint strings starting with letter O. Input
2176 parameter C is the second letter following the "O" in the constraint
2177 string. Returns 1 if VALUE meets the respective constraint and 0
2181 s390_O_constraint_str (const char c
, HOST_WIDE_INT value
)
2189 return trunc_int_for_mode (value
, SImode
) == value
;
2193 || s390_single_part (GEN_INT (value
), DImode
, SImode
, 0) == 1;
2196 return s390_single_part (GEN_INT (value
- 1), DImode
, SImode
, -1) == 1;
2204 /* Evaluates constraint strings starting with letter N. Parameter STR
2205 contains the letters following letter "N" in the constraint string.
2206 Returns true if VALUE matches the constraint. */
2209 s390_N_constraint_str (const char *str
, HOST_WIDE_INT value
)
2211 enum machine_mode mode
, part_mode
;
2213 int part
, part_goal
;
2219 part_goal
= str
[0] - '0';
2263 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (part_mode
))
2266 part
= s390_single_part (GEN_INT (value
), mode
, part_mode
, def
);
2269 if (part_goal
!= -1 && part_goal
!= part
)
2276 /* Returns true if the input parameter VALUE is a float zero. */
2279 s390_float_const_zero_p (rtx value
)
2281 return (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (value
)) == MODE_FLOAT
2282 && value
== CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (value
)));
2286 /* Compute a (partial) cost for rtx X. Return true if the complete
2287 cost has been computed, and false if subexpressions should be
2288 scanned. In either case, *TOTAL contains the cost result.
2289 CODE contains GET_CODE (x), OUTER_CODE contains the code
2290 of the superexpression of x. */
2293 s390_rtx_costs (rtx x
, int code
, int outer_code
, int *total
,
2294 bool speed ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2317 *total
= COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
2322 /* Check for multiply and add. */
2323 if ((GET_MODE (x
) == DFmode
|| GET_MODE (x
) == SFmode
)
2324 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
2325 && TARGET_HARD_FLOAT
&& TARGET_FUSED_MADD
)
2327 /* This is the multiply and add case. */
2328 if (GET_MODE (x
) == DFmode
)
2329 *total
= s390_cost
->madbr
;
2331 *total
= s390_cost
->maebr
;
2332 *total
+= rtx_cost (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), MULT
, speed
)
2333 + rtx_cost (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1), MULT
, speed
)
2334 + rtx_cost (XEXP (x
, 1), code
, speed
);
2335 return true; /* Do not do an additional recursive descent. */
2337 *total
= COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
2341 switch (GET_MODE (x
))
2345 rtx left
= XEXP (x
, 0);
2346 rtx right
= XEXP (x
, 1);
2347 if (GET_CODE (right
) == CONST_INT
2348 && CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (right
)))
2349 *total
= s390_cost
->mhi
;
2350 else if (GET_CODE (left
) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
2351 *total
= s390_cost
->mh
;
2353 *total
= s390_cost
->ms
; /* msr, ms, msy */
2358 rtx left
= XEXP (x
, 0);
2359 rtx right
= XEXP (x
, 1);
2362 if (GET_CODE (right
) == CONST_INT
2363 && CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (right
)))
2364 *total
= s390_cost
->mghi
;
2365 else if (GET_CODE (left
) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
2366 *total
= s390_cost
->msgf
;
2368 *total
= s390_cost
->msg
; /* msgr, msg */
2370 else /* TARGET_31BIT */
2372 if (GET_CODE (left
) == SIGN_EXTEND
2373 && GET_CODE (right
) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
2374 /* mulsidi case: mr, m */
2375 *total
= s390_cost
->m
;
2376 else if (GET_CODE (left
) == ZERO_EXTEND
2377 && GET_CODE (right
) == ZERO_EXTEND
2378 && TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
2379 /* umulsidi case: ml, mlr */
2380 *total
= s390_cost
->ml
;
2382 /* Complex calculation is required. */
2383 *total
= COSTS_N_INSNS (40);
2389 *total
= s390_cost
->mult_df
;
2392 *total
= s390_cost
->mxbr
;
2401 if (GET_MODE (x
) == TImode
) /* 128 bit division */
2402 *total
= s390_cost
->dlgr
;
2403 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == DImode
)
2405 rtx right
= XEXP (x
, 1);
2406 if (GET_CODE (right
) == ZERO_EXTEND
) /* 64 by 32 bit division */
2407 *total
= s390_cost
->dlr
;
2408 else /* 64 by 64 bit division */
2409 *total
= s390_cost
->dlgr
;
2411 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == SImode
) /* 32 bit division */
2412 *total
= s390_cost
->dlr
;
2417 if (GET_MODE (x
) == DImode
)
2419 rtx right
= XEXP (x
, 1);
2420 if (GET_CODE (right
) == ZERO_EXTEND
) /* 64 by 32 bit division */
2422 *total
= s390_cost
->dsgfr
;
2424 *total
= s390_cost
->dr
;
2425 else /* 64 by 64 bit division */
2426 *total
= s390_cost
->dsgr
;
2428 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == SImode
) /* 32 bit division */
2429 *total
= s390_cost
->dlr
;
2430 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == SFmode
)
2432 *total
= s390_cost
->debr
;
2434 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == DFmode
)
2436 *total
= s390_cost
->ddbr
;
2438 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == TFmode
)
2440 *total
= s390_cost
->dxbr
;
2445 if (GET_MODE (x
) == SFmode
)
2446 *total
= s390_cost
->sqebr
;
2447 else if (GET_MODE (x
) == DFmode
)
2448 *total
= s390_cost
->sqdbr
;
2450 *total
= s390_cost
->sqxbr
;
2455 if (outer_code
== MULT
|| outer_code
== DIV
|| outer_code
== MOD
2456 || outer_code
== PLUS
|| outer_code
== MINUS
2457 || outer_code
== COMPARE
)
2462 *total
= COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
2463 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == AND
2464 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == CONST_INT
2465 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
)
2467 rtx op0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
2468 rtx op1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
2469 rtx op2
= XEXP (x
, 1);
2471 if (memory_operand (op0
, GET_MODE (op0
))
2472 && s390_tm_ccmode (op1
, op2
, 0) != VOIDmode
)
2474 if (register_operand (op0
, GET_MODE (op0
))
2475 && s390_tm_ccmode (op1
, op2
, 1) != VOIDmode
)
2485 /* Return the cost of an address rtx ADDR. */
2488 s390_address_cost (rtx addr
, bool speed ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2490 struct s390_address ad
;
2491 if (!s390_decompose_address (addr
, &ad
))
2494 return ad
.indx
? COSTS_N_INSNS (1) + 1 : COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
2497 /* If OP is a SYMBOL_REF of a thread-local symbol, return its TLS mode,
2498 otherwise return 0. */
2501 tls_symbolic_operand (rtx op
)
2503 if (GET_CODE (op
) != SYMBOL_REF
)
2505 return SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op
);
2508 /* Split DImode access register reference REG (on 64-bit) into its constituent
2509 low and high parts, and store them into LO and HI. Note that gen_lowpart/
2510 gen_highpart cannot be used as they assume all registers are word-sized,
2511 while our access registers have only half that size. */
2514 s390_split_access_reg (rtx reg
, rtx
*lo
, rtx
*hi
)
2516 gcc_assert (TARGET_64BIT
);
2517 gcc_assert (ACCESS_REG_P (reg
));
2518 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (reg
) == DImode
);
2519 gcc_assert (!(REGNO (reg
) & 1));
2521 *lo
= gen_rtx_REG (SImode
, REGNO (reg
) + 1);
2522 *hi
= gen_rtx_REG (SImode
, REGNO (reg
));
2525 /* Return true if OP contains a symbol reference */
2528 symbolic_reference_mentioned_p (rtx op
)
2533 if (GET_CODE (op
) == SYMBOL_REF
|| GET_CODE (op
) == LABEL_REF
)
2536 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (op
));
2537 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (op
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
2543 for (j
= XVECLEN (op
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
2544 if (symbolic_reference_mentioned_p (XVECEXP (op
, i
, j
)))
2548 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e' && symbolic_reference_mentioned_p (XEXP (op
, i
)))
2555 /* Return true if OP contains a reference to a thread-local symbol. */
2558 tls_symbolic_reference_mentioned_p (rtx op
)
2563 if (GET_CODE (op
) == SYMBOL_REF
)
2564 return tls_symbolic_operand (op
);
2566 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (op
));
2567 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (op
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
2573 for (j
= XVECLEN (op
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
2574 if (tls_symbolic_reference_mentioned_p (XVECEXP (op
, i
, j
)))
2578 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e' && tls_symbolic_reference_mentioned_p (XEXP (op
, i
)))
2586 /* Return true if OP is a legitimate general operand when
2587 generating PIC code. It is given that flag_pic is on
2588 and that OP satisfies CONSTANT_P or is a CONST_DOUBLE. */
2591 legitimate_pic_operand_p (rtx op
)
2593 /* Accept all non-symbolic constants. */
2594 if (!SYMBOLIC_CONST (op
))
2597 /* Reject everything else; must be handled
2598 via emit_symbolic_move. */
2602 /* Returns true if the constant value OP is a legitimate general operand.
2603 It is given that OP satisfies CONSTANT_P or is a CONST_DOUBLE. */
2606 legitimate_constant_p (rtx op
)
2608 /* Accept all non-symbolic constants. */
2609 if (!SYMBOLIC_CONST (op
))
2612 /* Accept immediate LARL operands. */
2613 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
&& larl_operand (op
, VOIDmode
))
2616 /* Thread-local symbols are never legal constants. This is
2617 so that emit_call knows that computing such addresses
2618 might require a function call. */
2619 if (TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (op
))
2622 /* In the PIC case, symbolic constants must *not* be
2623 forced into the literal pool. We accept them here,
2624 so that they will be handled by emit_symbolic_move. */
2628 /* All remaining non-PIC symbolic constants are
2629 forced into the literal pool. */
2633 /* Determine if it's legal to put X into the constant pool. This
2634 is not possible if X contains the address of a symbol that is
2635 not constant (TLS) or not known at final link time (PIC). */
2638 s390_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx x
)
2640 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
2644 /* Accept all non-symbolic constants. */
2648 /* Labels are OK iff we are non-PIC. */
2649 return flag_pic
!= 0;
2652 /* 'Naked' TLS symbol references are never OK,
2653 non-TLS symbols are OK iff we are non-PIC. */
2654 if (tls_symbolic_operand (x
))
2657 return flag_pic
!= 0;
2660 return s390_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x
, 0));
2663 return s390_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x
, 0))
2664 || s390_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x
, 1));
2667 switch (XINT (x
, 1))
2669 /* Only lt-relative or GOT-relative UNSPECs are OK. */
2670 case UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
:
2678 case UNSPEC_GOTNTPOFF
:
2679 case UNSPEC_INDNTPOFF
:
2682 /* If the literal pool shares the code section, be put
2683 execute template placeholders into the pool as well. */
2685 return TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
;
2697 /* Returns true if the constant value OP is a legitimate general
2698 operand during and after reload. The difference to
2699 legitimate_constant_p is that this function will not accept
2700 a constant that would need to be forced to the literal pool
2701 before it can be used as operand. */
2704 legitimate_reload_constant_p (rtx op
)
2706 /* Accept la(y) operands. */
2707 if (GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_INT
2708 && DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (op
)))
2711 /* Accept l(g)hi/l(g)fi operands. */
2712 if (GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_INT
2713 && (CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (op
)) || CONST_OK_FOR_Os (INTVAL (op
))))
2716 /* Accept lliXX operands. */
2718 && GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_INT
2719 && trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (op
), word_mode
) == INTVAL (op
)
2720 && s390_single_part (op
, word_mode
, HImode
, 0) >= 0)
2724 && GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_INT
2725 && trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (op
), word_mode
) == INTVAL (op
)
2726 && s390_single_part (op
, word_mode
, SImode
, 0) >= 0)
2729 /* Accept larl operands. */
2730 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
2731 && larl_operand (op
, VOIDmode
))
2734 /* Accept lzXX operands. */
2735 if (GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_DOUBLE
2736 && CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (op
, 'G', "G"))
2739 /* Accept double-word operands that can be split. */
2740 if (GET_CODE (op
) == CONST_INT
2741 && trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (op
), word_mode
) != INTVAL (op
))
2743 enum machine_mode dword_mode
= word_mode
== SImode
? DImode
: TImode
;
2744 rtx hi
= operand_subword (op
, 0, 0, dword_mode
);
2745 rtx lo
= operand_subword (op
, 1, 0, dword_mode
);
2746 return legitimate_reload_constant_p (hi
)
2747 && legitimate_reload_constant_p (lo
);
2750 /* Everything else cannot be handled without reload. */
2754 /* Given an rtx OP being reloaded into a reg required to be in class RCLASS,
2755 return the class of reg to actually use. */
2758 s390_preferred_reload_class (rtx op
, enum reg_class rclass
)
2760 switch (GET_CODE (op
))
2762 /* Constants we cannot reload must be forced into the
2767 if (legitimate_reload_constant_p (op
))
2772 /* If a symbolic constant or a PLUS is reloaded,
2773 it is most likely being used as an address, so
2774 prefer ADDR_REGS. If 'class' is not a superset
2775 of ADDR_REGS, e.g. FP_REGS, reject this reload. */
2780 if (reg_class_subset_p (ADDR_REGS
, rclass
))
2792 /* Return true if ADDR is of kind symbol_ref or symbol_ref + const_int
2793 and return these parts in SYMREF and ADDEND. You can pass NULL in
2794 SYMREF and/or ADDEND if you are not interested in these values. */
2797 s390_symref_operand_p (rtx addr
, rtx
*symref
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*addend
)
2799 HOST_WIDE_INT tmpaddend
= 0;
2801 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == CONST
)
2802 addr
= XEXP (addr
, 0);
2804 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
)
2806 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
2807 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (addr
, 1)))
2809 tmpaddend
= INTVAL (XEXP (addr
, 1));
2810 addr
= XEXP (addr
, 0);
2816 if (GET_CODE (addr
) != SYMBOL_REF
)
2822 *addend
= tmpaddend
;
2827 /* Return true if ADDR is SYMBOL_REF + addend with addend being a
2828 multiple of ALIGNMENT and the SYMBOL_REF being naturally
2832 s390_check_symref_alignment (rtx addr
, HOST_WIDE_INT alignment
)
2834 HOST_WIDE_INT addend
;
2837 if (!s390_symref_operand_p (addr
, &symref
, &addend
))
2840 return (!SYMBOL_REF_NOT_NATURALLY_ALIGNED_P (symref
)
2841 && !(addend
& (alignment
- 1)));
2844 /* ADDR is moved into REG using larl. If ADDR isn't a valid larl
2845 operand SCRATCH is used to reload the even part of the address and
2849 s390_reload_larl_operand (rtx reg
, rtx addr
, rtx scratch
)
2851 HOST_WIDE_INT addend
;
2854 if (!s390_symref_operand_p (addr
, &symref
, &addend
))
2858 /* Easy case. The addend is even so larl will do fine. */
2859 emit_move_insn (reg
, addr
);
2862 /* We can leave the scratch register untouched if the target
2863 register is a valid base register. */
2864 if (REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2865 && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (reg
)) == ADDR_REGS
)
2868 gcc_assert (REGNO (scratch
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2869 gcc_assert (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (scratch
)) == ADDR_REGS
);
2872 emit_move_insn (scratch
,
2873 gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
,
2874 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, symref
,
2875 GEN_INT (addend
- 1))));
2877 emit_move_insn (scratch
, symref
);
2879 /* Increment the address using la in order to avoid clobbering cc. */
2880 emit_move_insn (reg
, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, scratch
, const1_rtx
));
2884 /* Generate what is necessary to move between REG and MEM using
2885 SCRATCH. The direction is given by TOMEM. */
2888 s390_reload_symref_address (rtx reg
, rtx mem
, rtx scratch
, bool tomem
)
2890 /* Reload might have pulled a constant out of the literal pool.
2891 Force it back in. */
2892 if (CONST_INT_P (mem
) || GET_CODE (mem
) == CONST_DOUBLE
2893 || GET_CODE (mem
) == CONST
)
2894 mem
= force_const_mem (GET_MODE (reg
), mem
);
2896 gcc_assert (MEM_P (mem
));
2898 /* For a load from memory we can leave the scratch register
2899 untouched if the target register is a valid base register. */
2901 && REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2902 && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (reg
)) == ADDR_REGS
2903 && GET_MODE (reg
) == GET_MODE (scratch
))
2906 /* Load address into scratch register. Since we can't have a
2907 secondary reload for a secondary reload we have to cover the case
2908 where larl would need a secondary reload here as well. */
2909 s390_reload_larl_operand (scratch
, XEXP (mem
, 0), scratch
);
2911 /* Now we can use a standard load/store to do the move. */
2913 emit_move_insn (replace_equiv_address (mem
, scratch
), reg
);
2915 emit_move_insn (reg
, replace_equiv_address (mem
, scratch
));
2918 /* Inform reload about cases where moving X with a mode MODE to a register in
2919 RCLASS requires an extra scratch or immediate register. Return the class
2920 needed for the immediate register. */
2922 static enum reg_class
2923 s390_secondary_reload (bool in_p
, rtx x
, enum reg_class rclass
,
2924 enum machine_mode mode
, secondary_reload_info
*sri
)
2926 /* Intermediate register needed. */
2927 if (reg_classes_intersect_p (CC_REGS
, rclass
))
2928 return GENERAL_REGS
;
2932 /* On z10 several optimizer steps may generate larl operands with
2935 && s390_symref_operand_p (x
, NULL
, NULL
)
2937 && !s390_check_symref_alignment (x
, 2))
2938 sri
->icode
= ((mode
== DImode
) ? CODE_FOR_reloaddi_larl_odd_addend_z10
2939 : CODE_FOR_reloadsi_larl_odd_addend_z10
);
2941 /* On z10 we need a scratch register when moving QI, TI or floating
2942 point mode values from or to a memory location with a SYMBOL_REF
2943 or if the symref addend of a SI or DI move is not aligned to the
2944 width of the access. */
2946 && s390_symref_operand_p (XEXP (x
, 0), NULL
, NULL
)
2947 && (mode
== QImode
|| mode
== TImode
|| FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
)
2948 || (!TARGET_64BIT
&& mode
== DImode
)
2949 || ((mode
== HImode
|| mode
== SImode
|| mode
== DImode
)
2950 && (!s390_check_symref_alignment (XEXP (x
, 0),
2951 GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))))))
2953 #define __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE(M,m) \
2956 sri->icode = in_p ? CODE_FOR_reload##m##di_toreg_z10 : \
2957 CODE_FOR_reload##m##di_tomem_z10; \
2959 sri->icode = in_p ? CODE_FOR_reload##m##si_toreg_z10 : \
2960 CODE_FOR_reload##m##si_tomem_z10; \
2963 switch (GET_MODE (x
))
2965 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (QI
, qi
);
2966 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (HI
, hi
);
2967 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (SI
, si
);
2968 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (DI
, di
);
2969 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (TI
, ti
);
2970 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (SF
, sf
);
2971 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (DF
, df
);
2972 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (TF
, tf
);
2973 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (SD
, sd
);
2974 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (DD
, dd
);
2975 __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE (TD
, td
);
2980 #undef __SECONDARY_RELOAD_CASE
2984 /* We need a scratch register when loading a PLUS expression which
2985 is not a legitimate operand of the LOAD ADDRESS instruction. */
2986 if (in_p
&& s390_plus_operand (x
, mode
))
2987 sri
->icode
= (TARGET_64BIT
?
2988 CODE_FOR_reloaddi_plus
: CODE_FOR_reloadsi_plus
);
2990 /* Performing a multiword move from or to memory we have to make sure the
2991 second chunk in memory is addressable without causing a displacement
2992 overflow. If that would be the case we calculate the address in
2993 a scratch register. */
2995 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
2996 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2997 && !DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
2998 + GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) - 1))
3000 /* For GENERAL_REGS a displacement overflow is no problem if occurring
3001 in a s_operand address since we may fallback to lm/stm. So we only
3002 have to care about overflows in the b+i+d case. */
3003 if ((reg_classes_intersect_p (GENERAL_REGS
, rclass
)
3004 && s390_class_max_nregs (GENERAL_REGS
, mode
) > 1
3005 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == PLUS
)
3006 /* For FP_REGS no lm/stm is available so this check is triggered
3007 for displacement overflows in b+i+d and b+d like addresses. */
3008 || (reg_classes_intersect_p (FP_REGS
, rclass
)
3009 && s390_class_max_nregs (FP_REGS
, mode
) > 1))
3012 sri
->icode
= (TARGET_64BIT
?
3013 CODE_FOR_reloaddi_nonoffmem_in
:
3014 CODE_FOR_reloadsi_nonoffmem_in
);
3016 sri
->icode
= (TARGET_64BIT
?
3017 CODE_FOR_reloaddi_nonoffmem_out
:
3018 CODE_FOR_reloadsi_nonoffmem_out
);
3022 /* A scratch address register is needed when a symbolic constant is
3023 copied to r0 compiling with -fPIC. In other cases the target
3024 register might be used as temporary (see legitimize_pic_address). */
3025 if (in_p
&& SYMBOLIC_CONST (x
) && flag_pic
== 2 && rclass
!= ADDR_REGS
)
3026 sri
->icode
= (TARGET_64BIT
?
3027 CODE_FOR_reloaddi_PIC_addr
:
3028 CODE_FOR_reloadsi_PIC_addr
);
3030 /* Either scratch or no register needed. */
3034 /* Generate code to load SRC, which is PLUS that is not a
3035 legitimate operand for the LA instruction, into TARGET.
3036 SCRATCH may be used as scratch register. */
3039 s390_expand_plus_operand (rtx target
, rtx src
,
3043 struct s390_address ad
;
3045 /* src must be a PLUS; get its two operands. */
3046 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PLUS
);
3047 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (src
) == Pmode
);
3049 /* Check if any of the two operands is already scheduled
3050 for replacement by reload. This can happen e.g. when
3051 float registers occur in an address. */
3052 sum1
= find_replacement (&XEXP (src
, 0));
3053 sum2
= find_replacement (&XEXP (src
, 1));
3054 src
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, sum1
, sum2
);
3056 /* If the address is already strictly valid, there's nothing to do. */
3057 if (!s390_decompose_address (src
, &ad
)
3058 || (ad
.base
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (ad
.base
)))
3059 || (ad
.indx
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (REGNO (ad
.indx
))))
3061 /* Otherwise, one of the operands cannot be an address register;
3062 we reload its value into the scratch register. */
3063 if (true_regnum (sum1
) < 1 || true_regnum (sum1
) > 15)
3065 emit_move_insn (scratch
, sum1
);
3068 if (true_regnum (sum2
) < 1 || true_regnum (sum2
) > 15)
3070 emit_move_insn (scratch
, sum2
);
3074 /* According to the way these invalid addresses are generated
3075 in reload.c, it should never happen (at least on s390) that
3076 *neither* of the PLUS components, after find_replacements
3077 was applied, is an address register. */
3078 if (sum1
== scratch
&& sum2
== scratch
)
3084 src
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, sum1
, sum2
);
3087 /* Emit the LOAD ADDRESS pattern. Note that reload of PLUS
3088 is only ever performed on addresses, so we can mark the
3089 sum as legitimate for LA in any case. */
3090 s390_load_address (target
, src
);
3094 /* Return true if ADDR is a valid memory address.
3095 STRICT specifies whether strict register checking applies. */
3098 legitimate_address_p (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx addr
, int strict
)
3100 struct s390_address ad
;
3103 && larl_operand (addr
, VOIDmode
)
3104 && (mode
== VOIDmode
3105 || s390_check_symref_alignment (addr
, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))))
3108 if (!s390_decompose_address (addr
, &ad
))
3113 if (ad
.base
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (ad
.base
)))
3116 if (ad
.indx
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (REGNO (ad
.indx
)))
3122 && !(REGNO (ad
.base
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3123 || REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (ad
.base
)) == ADDR_REGS
))
3127 && !(REGNO (ad
.indx
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3128 || REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (ad
.indx
)) == ADDR_REGS
))
3134 /* Return true if OP is a valid operand for the LA instruction.
3135 In 31-bit, we need to prove that the result is used as an
3136 address, as LA performs only a 31-bit addition. */
3139 legitimate_la_operand_p (rtx op
)
3141 struct s390_address addr
;
3142 if (!s390_decompose_address (op
, &addr
))
3145 return (TARGET_64BIT
|| addr
.pointer
);
3148 /* Return true if it is valid *and* preferable to use LA to
3149 compute the sum of OP1 and OP2. */
3152 preferred_la_operand_p (rtx op1
, rtx op2
)
3154 struct s390_address addr
;
3156 if (op2
!= const0_rtx
)
3157 op1
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, op1
, op2
);
3159 if (!s390_decompose_address (op1
, &addr
))
3161 if (addr
.base
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (addr
.base
)))
3163 if (addr
.indx
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (REGNO (addr
.indx
)))
3166 if (!TARGET_64BIT
&& !addr
.pointer
)
3172 if ((addr
.base
&& REG_P (addr
.base
) && REG_POINTER (addr
.base
))
3173 || (addr
.indx
&& REG_P (addr
.indx
) && REG_POINTER (addr
.indx
)))
3179 /* Emit a forced load-address operation to load SRC into DST.
3180 This will use the LOAD ADDRESS instruction even in situations
3181 where legitimate_la_operand_p (SRC) returns false. */
3184 s390_load_address (rtx dst
, rtx src
)
3187 emit_move_insn (dst
, src
);
3189 emit_insn (gen_force_la_31 (dst
, src
));
3192 /* Return a legitimate reference for ORIG (an address) using the
3193 register REG. If REG is 0, a new pseudo is generated.
3195 There are two types of references that must be handled:
3197 1. Global data references must load the address from the GOT, via
3198 the PIC reg. An insn is emitted to do this load, and the reg is
3201 2. Static data references, constant pool addresses, and code labels
3202 compute the address as an offset from the GOT, whose base is in
3203 the PIC reg. Static data objects have SYMBOL_FLAG_LOCAL set to
3204 differentiate them from global data objects. The returned
3205 address is the PIC reg + an unspec constant.
3207 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS rejects symbolic references unless the PIC
3208 reg also appears in the address. */
3211 legitimize_pic_address (rtx orig
, rtx reg
)
3217 gcc_assert (!TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (addr
));
3219 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == LABEL_REF
3220 || (GET_CODE (addr
) == SYMBOL_REF
&& SYMBOL_REF_LOCAL_P (addr
)))
3222 /* This is a local symbol. */
3223 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
&& larl_operand (addr
, VOIDmode
))
3225 /* Access local symbols PC-relative via LARL.
3226 This is the same as in the non-PIC case, so it is
3227 handled automatically ... */
3231 /* Access local symbols relative to the GOT. */
3233 rtx temp
= reg
? reg
: gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3235 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3236 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3238 addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_GOTOFF
);
3239 addr
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, addr
);
3240 addr
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, addr
);
3241 emit_move_insn (temp
, addr
);
3243 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, temp
);
3246 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3251 else if (GET_CODE (addr
) == SYMBOL_REF
)
3254 reg
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3258 /* Assume GOT offset < 4k. This is handled the same way
3259 in both 31- and 64-bit code (@GOT). */
3261 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3262 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3264 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_GOT
);
3265 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3266 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, new_rtx
);
3267 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3268 emit_move_insn (reg
, new_rtx
);
3271 else if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
3273 /* If the GOT offset might be >= 4k, we determine the position
3274 of the GOT entry via a PC-relative LARL (@GOTENT). */
3276 rtx temp
= reg
? reg
: gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3278 gcc_assert (REGNO (temp
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3279 || REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (temp
)) == ADDR_REGS
);
3281 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_GOTENT
);
3282 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3283 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3285 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, temp
);
3286 emit_move_insn (reg
, new_rtx
);
3291 /* If the GOT offset might be >= 4k, we have to load it
3292 from the literal pool (@GOT). */
3294 rtx temp
= reg
? reg
: gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3296 gcc_assert (REGNO (temp
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3297 || REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (temp
)) == ADDR_REGS
);
3299 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3300 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3302 addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_GOT
);
3303 addr
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, addr
);
3304 addr
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, addr
);
3305 emit_move_insn (temp
, addr
);
3307 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, temp
);
3308 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3309 emit_move_insn (reg
, new_rtx
);
3315 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == CONST
)
3317 addr
= XEXP (addr
, 0);
3318 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == UNSPEC
)
3320 gcc_assert (XVECLEN (addr
, 0) == 1);
3321 switch (XINT (addr
, 1))
3323 /* If someone moved a GOT-relative UNSPEC
3324 out of the literal pool, force them back in. */
3327 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, orig
);
3330 /* @GOT is OK as is if small. */
3333 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, orig
);
3336 /* @GOTENT is OK as is. */
3340 /* @PLT is OK as is on 64-bit, must be converted to
3341 GOT-relative @PLTOFF on 31-bit. */
3343 if (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
3345 rtx temp
= reg
? reg
: gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3347 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3348 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3350 addr
= XVECEXP (addr
, 0, 0);
3351 addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
),
3353 addr
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, addr
);
3354 addr
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, addr
);
3355 emit_move_insn (temp
, addr
);
3357 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, temp
);
3360 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3366 /* Everything else cannot happen. */
3372 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
);
3374 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
)
3376 rtx op0
= XEXP (addr
, 0), op1
= XEXP (addr
, 1);
3378 gcc_assert (!TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (op0
));
3379 gcc_assert (!TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (op1
));
3381 /* Check first to see if this is a constant offset
3382 from a local symbol reference. */
3383 if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == LABEL_REF
3384 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == SYMBOL_REF
&& SYMBOL_REF_LOCAL_P (op0
)))
3385 && GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
)
3387 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
3388 && larl_operand (op0
, VOIDmode
)
3389 && INTVAL (op1
) < (HOST_WIDE_INT
)1 << 31
3390 && INTVAL (op1
) >= -((HOST_WIDE_INT
)1 << 31))
3392 if (INTVAL (op1
) & 1)
3394 /* LARL can't handle odd offsets, so emit a
3395 pair of LARL and LA. */
3396 rtx temp
= reg
? reg
: gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3398 if (!DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (op1
)))
3400 HOST_WIDE_INT even
= INTVAL (op1
) - 1;
3401 op0
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, op0
, GEN_INT (even
));
3402 op0
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, op0
);
3406 emit_move_insn (temp
, op0
);
3407 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, temp
, op1
);
3411 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3417 /* If the offset is even, we can just use LARL.
3418 This will happen automatically. */
3423 /* Access local symbols relative to the GOT. */
3425 rtx temp
= reg
? reg
: gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3427 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3428 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3430 addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, op0
),
3432 addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, addr
, op1
);
3433 addr
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, addr
);
3434 addr
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, addr
);
3435 emit_move_insn (temp
, addr
);
3437 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, temp
);
3440 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3446 /* Now, check whether it is a GOT relative symbol plus offset
3447 that was pulled out of the literal pool. Force it back in. */
3449 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == UNSPEC
3450 && GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
3451 && XINT (op0
, 1) == UNSPEC_GOTOFF
)
3453 gcc_assert (XVECLEN (op0
, 0) == 1);
3455 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, orig
);
3458 /* Otherwise, compute the sum. */
3461 base
= legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (addr
, 0), reg
);
3462 new_rtx
= legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (addr
, 1),
3463 base
== reg
? NULL_RTX
: reg
);
3464 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CONST_INT
)
3465 new_rtx
= plus_constant (base
, INTVAL (new_rtx
));
3468 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == PLUS
&& CONSTANT_P (XEXP (new_rtx
, 1)))
3470 base
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, base
, XEXP (new_rtx
, 0));
3471 new_rtx
= XEXP (new_rtx
, 1);
3473 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, base
, new_rtx
);
3476 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CONST
)
3477 new_rtx
= XEXP (new_rtx
, 0);
3478 new_rtx
= force_operand (new_rtx
, 0);
3485 /* Load the thread pointer into a register. */
3488 s390_get_thread_pointer (void)
3490 rtx tp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3492 emit_move_insn (tp
, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, TP_REGNUM
));
3493 mark_reg_pointer (tp
, BITS_PER_WORD
);
3498 /* Emit a tls call insn. The call target is the SYMBOL_REF stored
3499 in s390_tls_symbol which always refers to __tls_get_offset.
3500 The returned offset is written to RESULT_REG and an USE rtx is
3501 generated for TLS_CALL. */
3503 static GTY(()) rtx s390_tls_symbol
;
3506 s390_emit_tls_call_insn (rtx result_reg
, rtx tls_call
)
3510 gcc_assert (flag_pic
);
3512 if (!s390_tls_symbol
)
3513 s390_tls_symbol
= gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, "__tls_get_offset");
3515 insn
= s390_emit_call (s390_tls_symbol
, tls_call
, result_reg
,
3516 gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
));
3518 use_reg (&CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn
), result_reg
);
3519 RTL_CONST_CALL_P (insn
) = 1;
3522 /* ADDR contains a thread-local SYMBOL_REF. Generate code to compute
3523 this (thread-local) address. REG may be used as temporary. */
3526 legitimize_tls_address (rtx addr
, rtx reg
)
3528 rtx new_rtx
, tls_call
, temp
, base
, r2
, insn
;
3530 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == SYMBOL_REF
)
3531 switch (tls_symbolic_operand (addr
))
3533 case TLS_MODEL_GLOBAL_DYNAMIC
:
3535 r2
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 2);
3536 tls_call
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_TLSGD
);
3537 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, tls_call
);
3538 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3539 emit_move_insn (r2
, new_rtx
);
3540 s390_emit_tls_call_insn (r2
, tls_call
);
3541 insn
= get_insns ();
3544 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_NTPOFF
);
3545 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3546 emit_libcall_block (insn
, temp
, r2
, new_rtx
);
3548 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, s390_get_thread_pointer (), temp
);
3551 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3556 case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC
:
3558 r2
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 2);
3559 tls_call
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, const0_rtx
), UNSPEC_TLSLDM
);
3560 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, tls_call
);
3561 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3562 emit_move_insn (r2
, new_rtx
);
3563 s390_emit_tls_call_insn (r2
, tls_call
);
3564 insn
= get_insns ();
3567 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, const0_rtx
), UNSPEC_TLSLDM_NTPOFF
);
3568 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3569 emit_libcall_block (insn
, temp
, r2
, new_rtx
);
3571 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, s390_get_thread_pointer (), temp
);
3572 base
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3573 s390_load_address (base
, new_rtx
);
3575 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_DTPOFF
);
3576 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3577 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3578 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3579 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3581 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, base
, temp
);
3584 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3589 case TLS_MODEL_INITIAL_EXEC
:
3592 /* Assume GOT offset < 4k. This is handled the same way
3593 in both 31- and 64-bit code. */
3595 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3596 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3598 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_GOTNTPOFF
);
3599 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3600 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, new_rtx
);
3601 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3602 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3603 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3605 else if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
3607 /* If the GOT offset might be >= 4k, we determine the position
3608 of the GOT entry via a PC-relative LARL. */
3610 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_INDNTPOFF
);
3611 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3612 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3613 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3615 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, temp
);
3616 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3617 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3621 /* If the GOT offset might be >= 4k, we have to load it
3622 from the literal pool. */
3624 if (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3625 df_set_regs_ever_live (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
, true);
3627 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_GOTNTPOFF
);
3628 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3629 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3630 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3631 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3633 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, temp
);
3634 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3636 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, new_rtx
, addr
), UNSPEC_TLS_LOAD
);
3637 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3638 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (Pmode
, temp
, new_rtx
));
3642 /* In position-dependent code, load the absolute address of
3643 the GOT entry from the literal pool. */
3645 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_INDNTPOFF
);
3646 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3647 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3648 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3649 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3652 new_rtx
= gen_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3653 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, new_rtx
, addr
), UNSPEC_TLS_LOAD
);
3654 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3655 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (Pmode
, temp
, new_rtx
));
3658 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, s390_get_thread_pointer (), temp
);
3661 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3666 case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_EXEC
:
3667 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, addr
), UNSPEC_NTPOFF
);
3668 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3669 new_rtx
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3670 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3671 emit_move_insn (temp
, new_rtx
);
3673 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, s390_get_thread_pointer (), temp
);
3676 s390_load_address (reg
, new_rtx
);
3685 else if (GET_CODE (addr
) == CONST
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (addr
, 0)) == UNSPEC
)
3687 switch (XINT (XEXP (addr
, 0), 1))
3689 case UNSPEC_INDNTPOFF
:
3690 gcc_assert (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
);
3699 else if (GET_CODE (addr
) == CONST
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (addr
, 0)) == PLUS
3700 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
)
3702 new_rtx
= XEXP (XEXP (addr
, 0), 0);
3703 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) != SYMBOL_REF
)
3704 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, new_rtx
);
3706 new_rtx
= legitimize_tls_address (new_rtx
, reg
);
3707 new_rtx
= plus_constant (new_rtx
, INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr
, 0), 1)));
3708 new_rtx
= force_operand (new_rtx
, 0);
3712 gcc_unreachable (); /* for now ... */
3717 /* Emit insns making the address in operands[1] valid for a standard
3718 move to operands[0]. operands[1] is replaced by an address which
3719 should be used instead of the former RTX to emit the move
3723 emit_symbolic_move (rtx
*operands
)
3725 rtx temp
= !can_create_pseudo_p () ? operands
[0] : gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3727 if (GET_CODE (operands
[0]) == MEM
)
3728 operands
[1] = force_reg (Pmode
, operands
[1]);
3729 else if (TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (operands
[1]))
3730 operands
[1] = legitimize_tls_address (operands
[1], temp
);
3732 operands
[1] = legitimize_pic_address (operands
[1], temp
);
3735 /* Try machine-dependent ways of modifying an illegitimate address X
3736 to be legitimate. If we find one, return the new, valid address.
3738 OLDX is the address as it was before break_out_memory_refs was called.
3739 In some cases it is useful to look at this to decide what needs to be done.
3741 MODE is the mode of the operand pointed to by X.
3743 When -fpic is used, special handling is needed for symbolic references.
3744 See comments by legitimize_pic_address for details. */
3747 legitimize_address (rtx x
, rtx oldx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
3748 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
3750 rtx constant_term
= const0_rtx
;
3752 if (TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (x
))
3754 x
= legitimize_tls_address (x
, 0);
3756 if (legitimate_address_p (mode
, x
, FALSE
))
3759 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == PLUS
3760 && (TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (XEXP (x
, 0))
3761 || TLS_SYMBOLIC_CONST (XEXP (x
, 1))))
3767 if (SYMBOLIC_CONST (x
)
3768 || (GET_CODE (x
) == PLUS
3769 && (SYMBOLIC_CONST (XEXP (x
, 0))
3770 || SYMBOLIC_CONST (XEXP (x
, 1)))))
3771 x
= legitimize_pic_address (x
, 0);
3773 if (legitimate_address_p (mode
, x
, FALSE
))
3777 x
= eliminate_constant_term (x
, &constant_term
);
3779 /* Optimize loading of large displacements by splitting them
3780 into the multiple of 4K and the rest; this allows the
3781 former to be CSE'd if possible.
3783 Don't do this if the displacement is added to a register
3784 pointing into the stack frame, as the offsets will
3785 change later anyway. */
3787 if (GET_CODE (constant_term
) == CONST_INT
3788 && !TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
3789 && !DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (constant_term
))
3790 && !(REG_P (x
) && REGNO_PTR_FRAME_P (REGNO (x
))))
3792 HOST_WIDE_INT lower
= INTVAL (constant_term
) & 0xfff;
3793 HOST_WIDE_INT upper
= INTVAL (constant_term
) ^ lower
;
3795 rtx temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3796 rtx val
= force_operand (GEN_INT (upper
), temp
);
3798 emit_move_insn (temp
, val
);
3800 x
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, x
, temp
);
3801 constant_term
= GEN_INT (lower
);
3804 if (GET_CODE (x
) == PLUS
)
3806 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == REG
)
3808 rtx temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3809 rtx val
= force_operand (XEXP (x
, 1), temp
);
3811 emit_move_insn (temp
, val
);
3813 x
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, XEXP (x
, 0), temp
);
3816 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == REG
)
3818 rtx temp
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3819 rtx val
= force_operand (XEXP (x
, 0), temp
);
3821 emit_move_insn (temp
, val
);
3823 x
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, temp
, XEXP (x
, 1));
3827 if (constant_term
!= const0_rtx
)
3828 x
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, x
, constant_term
);
3833 /* Try a machine-dependent way of reloading an illegitimate address AD
3834 operand. If we find one, push the reload and and return the new address.
3836 MODE is the mode of the enclosing MEM. OPNUM is the operand number
3837 and TYPE is the reload type of the current reload. */
3840 legitimize_reload_address (rtx ad
, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
3841 int opnum
, int type
)
3843 if (!optimize
|| TARGET_LONG_DISPLACEMENT
)
3846 if (GET_CODE (ad
) == PLUS
)
3848 rtx tem
= simplify_binary_operation (PLUS
, Pmode
,
3849 XEXP (ad
, 0), XEXP (ad
, 1));
3854 if (GET_CODE (ad
) == PLUS
3855 && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad
, 0)) == REG
3856 && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad
, 1)) == CONST_INT
3857 && !DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (XEXP (ad
, 1))))
3859 HOST_WIDE_INT lower
= INTVAL (XEXP (ad
, 1)) & 0xfff;
3860 HOST_WIDE_INT upper
= INTVAL (XEXP (ad
, 1)) ^ lower
;
3861 rtx cst
, tem
, new_rtx
;
3863 cst
= GEN_INT (upper
);
3864 if (!legitimate_reload_constant_p (cst
))
3865 cst
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, cst
);
3867 tem
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, XEXP (ad
, 0), cst
);
3868 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, tem
, GEN_INT (lower
));
3870 push_reload (XEXP (tem
, 1), 0, &XEXP (tem
, 1), 0,
3871 BASE_REG_CLASS
, Pmode
, VOIDmode
, 0, 0,
3872 opnum
, (enum reload_type
) type
);
3879 /* Emit code to move LEN bytes from DST to SRC. */
3882 s390_expand_movmem (rtx dst
, rtx src
, rtx len
)
3884 if (GET_CODE (len
) == CONST_INT
&& INTVAL (len
) >= 0 && INTVAL (len
) <= 256)
3886 if (INTVAL (len
) > 0)
3887 emit_insn (gen_movmem_short (dst
, src
, GEN_INT (INTVAL (len
) - 1)));
3890 else if (TARGET_MVCLE
)
3892 emit_insn (gen_movmem_long (dst
, src
, convert_to_mode (Pmode
, len
, 1)));
3897 rtx dst_addr
, src_addr
, count
, blocks
, temp
;
3898 rtx loop_start_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
3899 rtx loop_end_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
3900 rtx end_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
3901 enum machine_mode mode
;
3903 mode
= GET_MODE (len
);
3904 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
3907 dst_addr
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3908 src_addr
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
3909 count
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
3910 blocks
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
3912 convert_move (count
, len
, 1);
3913 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (count
, const0_rtx
,
3914 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, end_label
);
3916 emit_move_insn (dst_addr
, force_operand (XEXP (dst
, 0), NULL_RTX
));
3917 emit_move_insn (src_addr
, force_operand (XEXP (src
, 0), NULL_RTX
));
3918 dst
= change_address (dst
, VOIDmode
, dst_addr
);
3919 src
= change_address (src
, VOIDmode
, src_addr
);
3921 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, count
, constm1_rtx
, count
, 1, 0);
3923 emit_move_insn (count
, temp
);
3925 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, lshr_optab
, count
, GEN_INT (8), blocks
, 1, 0);
3927 emit_move_insn (blocks
, temp
);
3929 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (blocks
, const0_rtx
,
3930 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, loop_end_label
);
3932 emit_label (loop_start_label
);
3934 emit_insn (gen_movmem_short (dst
, src
, GEN_INT (255)));
3935 s390_load_address (dst_addr
,
3936 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, dst_addr
, GEN_INT (256)));
3937 s390_load_address (src_addr
,
3938 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, src_addr
, GEN_INT (256)));
3940 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, blocks
, constm1_rtx
, blocks
, 1, 0);
3942 emit_move_insn (blocks
, temp
);
3944 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (blocks
, const0_rtx
,
3945 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, loop_end_label
);
3947 emit_jump (loop_start_label
);
3948 emit_label (loop_end_label
);
3950 emit_insn (gen_movmem_short (dst
, src
,
3951 convert_to_mode (Pmode
, count
, 1)));
3952 emit_label (end_label
);
3956 /* Emit code to set LEN bytes at DST to VAL.
3957 Make use of clrmem if VAL is zero. */
3960 s390_expand_setmem (rtx dst
, rtx len
, rtx val
)
3962 if (GET_CODE (len
) == CONST_INT
&& INTVAL (len
) == 0)
3965 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (val
) == CONST_INT
|| GET_MODE (val
) == QImode
);
3967 if (GET_CODE (len
) == CONST_INT
&& INTVAL (len
) > 0 && INTVAL (len
) <= 257)
3969 if (val
== const0_rtx
&& INTVAL (len
) <= 256)
3970 emit_insn (gen_clrmem_short (dst
, GEN_INT (INTVAL (len
) - 1)));
3973 /* Initialize memory by storing the first byte. */
3974 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dst
, QImode
, 0), val
);
3976 if (INTVAL (len
) > 1)
3978 /* Initiate 1 byte overlap move.
3979 The first byte of DST is propagated through DSTP1.
3980 Prepare a movmem for: DST+1 = DST (length = LEN - 1).
3981 DST is set to size 1 so the rest of the memory location
3982 does not count as source operand. */
3983 rtx dstp1
= adjust_address (dst
, VOIDmode
, 1);
3984 set_mem_size (dst
, const1_rtx
);
3986 emit_insn (gen_movmem_short (dstp1
, dst
,
3987 GEN_INT (INTVAL (len
) - 2)));
3992 else if (TARGET_MVCLE
)
3994 val
= force_not_mem (convert_modes (Pmode
, QImode
, val
, 1));
3995 emit_insn (gen_setmem_long (dst
, convert_to_mode (Pmode
, len
, 1), val
));
4000 rtx dst_addr
, src_addr
, count
, blocks
, temp
, dstp1
= NULL_RTX
;
4001 rtx loop_start_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
4002 rtx loop_end_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
4003 rtx end_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
4004 enum machine_mode mode
;
4006 mode
= GET_MODE (len
);
4007 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
4010 dst_addr
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
4011 src_addr
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
4012 count
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
4013 blocks
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
4015 convert_move (count
, len
, 1);
4016 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (count
, const0_rtx
,
4017 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, end_label
);
4019 emit_move_insn (dst_addr
, force_operand (XEXP (dst
, 0), NULL_RTX
));
4020 dst
= change_address (dst
, VOIDmode
, dst_addr
);
4022 if (val
== const0_rtx
)
4023 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, count
, constm1_rtx
, count
, 1, 0);
4026 dstp1
= adjust_address (dst
, VOIDmode
, 1);
4027 set_mem_size (dst
, const1_rtx
);
4029 /* Initialize memory by storing the first byte. */
4030 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dst
, QImode
, 0), val
);
4032 /* If count is 1 we are done. */
4033 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (count
, const1_rtx
,
4034 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, end_label
);
4036 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, count
, GEN_INT (-2), count
, 1, 0);
4039 emit_move_insn (count
, temp
);
4041 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, lshr_optab
, count
, GEN_INT (8), blocks
, 1, 0);
4043 emit_move_insn (blocks
, temp
);
4045 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (blocks
, const0_rtx
,
4046 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, loop_end_label
);
4048 emit_label (loop_start_label
);
4050 if (val
== const0_rtx
)
4051 emit_insn (gen_clrmem_short (dst
, GEN_INT (255)));
4053 emit_insn (gen_movmem_short (dstp1
, dst
, GEN_INT (255)));
4054 s390_load_address (dst_addr
,
4055 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, dst_addr
, GEN_INT (256)));
4057 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, blocks
, constm1_rtx
, blocks
, 1, 0);
4059 emit_move_insn (blocks
, temp
);
4061 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (blocks
, const0_rtx
,
4062 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, loop_end_label
);
4064 emit_jump (loop_start_label
);
4065 emit_label (loop_end_label
);
4067 if (val
== const0_rtx
)
4068 emit_insn (gen_clrmem_short (dst
, convert_to_mode (Pmode
, count
, 1)));
4070 emit_insn (gen_movmem_short (dstp1
, dst
, convert_to_mode (Pmode
, count
, 1)));
4071 emit_label (end_label
);
4075 /* Emit code to compare LEN bytes at OP0 with those at OP1,
4076 and return the result in TARGET. */
4079 s390_expand_cmpmem (rtx target
, rtx op0
, rtx op1
, rtx len
)
4081 rtx ccreg
= gen_rtx_REG (CCUmode
, CC_REGNUM
);
4084 /* As the result of CMPINT is inverted compared to what we need,
4085 we have to swap the operands. */
4086 tmp
= op0
; op0
= op1
; op1
= tmp
;
4088 if (GET_CODE (len
) == CONST_INT
&& INTVAL (len
) >= 0 && INTVAL (len
) <= 256)
4090 if (INTVAL (len
) > 0)
4092 emit_insn (gen_cmpmem_short (op0
, op1
, GEN_INT (INTVAL (len
) - 1)));
4093 emit_insn (gen_cmpint (target
, ccreg
));
4096 emit_move_insn (target
, const0_rtx
);
4098 else if (TARGET_MVCLE
)
4100 emit_insn (gen_cmpmem_long (op0
, op1
, convert_to_mode (Pmode
, len
, 1)));
4101 emit_insn (gen_cmpint (target
, ccreg
));
4105 rtx addr0
, addr1
, count
, blocks
, temp
;
4106 rtx loop_start_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
4107 rtx loop_end_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
4108 rtx end_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
4109 enum machine_mode mode
;
4111 mode
= GET_MODE (len
);
4112 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
4115 addr0
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
4116 addr1
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
4117 count
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
4118 blocks
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
4120 convert_move (count
, len
, 1);
4121 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (count
, const0_rtx
,
4122 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, end_label
);
4124 emit_move_insn (addr0
, force_operand (XEXP (op0
, 0), NULL_RTX
));
4125 emit_move_insn (addr1
, force_operand (XEXP (op1
, 0), NULL_RTX
));
4126 op0
= change_address (op0
, VOIDmode
, addr0
);
4127 op1
= change_address (op1
, VOIDmode
, addr1
);
4129 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, count
, constm1_rtx
, count
, 1, 0);
4131 emit_move_insn (count
, temp
);
4133 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, lshr_optab
, count
, GEN_INT (8), blocks
, 1, 0);
4135 emit_move_insn (blocks
, temp
);
4137 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (blocks
, const0_rtx
,
4138 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, loop_end_label
);
4140 emit_label (loop_start_label
);
4142 emit_insn (gen_cmpmem_short (op0
, op1
, GEN_INT (255)));
4143 temp
= gen_rtx_NE (VOIDmode
, ccreg
, const0_rtx
);
4144 temp
= gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode
, temp
,
4145 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode
, end_label
), pc_rtx
);
4146 temp
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, pc_rtx
, temp
);
4147 emit_jump_insn (temp
);
4149 s390_load_address (addr0
,
4150 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, addr0
, GEN_INT (256)));
4151 s390_load_address (addr1
,
4152 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, addr1
, GEN_INT (256)));
4154 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, add_optab
, blocks
, constm1_rtx
, blocks
, 1, 0);
4156 emit_move_insn (blocks
, temp
);
4158 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (blocks
, const0_rtx
,
4159 EQ
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1, loop_end_label
);
4161 emit_jump (loop_start_label
);
4162 emit_label (loop_end_label
);
4164 emit_insn (gen_cmpmem_short (op0
, op1
,
4165 convert_to_mode (Pmode
, count
, 1)));
4166 emit_label (end_label
);
4168 emit_insn (gen_cmpint (target
, ccreg
));
4173 /* Expand conditional increment or decrement using alc/slb instructions.
4174 Should generate code setting DST to either SRC or SRC + INCREMENT,
4175 depending on the result of the comparison CMP_OP0 CMP_CODE CMP_OP1.
4176 Returns true if successful, false otherwise.
4178 That makes it possible to implement some if-constructs without jumps e.g.:
4179 (borrow = CC0 | CC1 and carry = CC2 | CC3)
4180 unsigned int a, b, c;
4181 if (a < b) c++; -> CCU b > a -> CC2; c += carry;
4182 if (a < b) c--; -> CCL3 a - b -> borrow; c -= borrow;
4183 if (a <= b) c++; -> CCL3 b - a -> borrow; c += carry;
4184 if (a <= b) c--; -> CCU a <= b -> borrow; c -= borrow;
4186 Checks for EQ and NE with a nonzero value need an additional xor e.g.:
4187 if (a == b) c++; -> CCL3 a ^= b; 0 - a -> borrow; c += carry;
4188 if (a == b) c--; -> CCU a ^= b; a <= 0 -> CC0 | CC1; c -= borrow;
4189 if (a != b) c++; -> CCU a ^= b; a > 0 -> CC2; c += carry;
4190 if (a != b) c--; -> CCL3 a ^= b; 0 - a -> borrow; c -= borrow; */
4193 s390_expand_addcc (enum rtx_code cmp_code
, rtx cmp_op0
, rtx cmp_op1
,
4194 rtx dst
, rtx src
, rtx increment
)
4196 enum machine_mode cmp_mode
;
4197 enum machine_mode cc_mode
;
4203 if ((GET_MODE (cmp_op0
) == SImode
|| GET_MODE (cmp_op0
) == VOIDmode
)
4204 && (GET_MODE (cmp_op1
) == SImode
|| GET_MODE (cmp_op1
) == VOIDmode
))
4206 else if ((GET_MODE (cmp_op0
) == DImode
|| GET_MODE (cmp_op0
) == VOIDmode
)
4207 && (GET_MODE (cmp_op1
) == DImode
|| GET_MODE (cmp_op1
) == VOIDmode
))
4212 /* Try ADD LOGICAL WITH CARRY. */
4213 if (increment
== const1_rtx
)
4215 /* Determine CC mode to use. */
4216 if (cmp_code
== EQ
|| cmp_code
== NE
)
4218 if (cmp_op1
!= const0_rtx
)
4220 cmp_op0
= expand_simple_binop (cmp_mode
, XOR
, cmp_op0
, cmp_op1
,
4221 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4222 cmp_op1
= const0_rtx
;
4225 cmp_code
= cmp_code
== EQ
? LEU
: GTU
;
4228 if (cmp_code
== LTU
|| cmp_code
== LEU
)
4233 cmp_code
= swap_condition (cmp_code
);
4250 /* Emit comparison instruction pattern. */
4251 if (!register_operand (cmp_op0
, cmp_mode
))
4252 cmp_op0
= force_reg (cmp_mode
, cmp_op0
);
4254 insn
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_REG (cc_mode
, CC_REGNUM
),
4255 gen_rtx_COMPARE (cc_mode
, cmp_op0
, cmp_op1
));
4256 /* We use insn_invalid_p here to add clobbers if required. */
4257 ret
= insn_invalid_p (emit_insn (insn
));
4260 /* Emit ALC instruction pattern. */
4261 op_res
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (cmp_code
, GET_MODE (dst
),
4262 gen_rtx_REG (cc_mode
, CC_REGNUM
),
4265 if (src
!= const0_rtx
)
4267 if (!register_operand (src
, GET_MODE (dst
)))
4268 src
= force_reg (GET_MODE (dst
), src
);
4270 op_res
= gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (dst
), op_res
, src
);
4271 op_res
= gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (dst
), op_res
, const0_rtx
);
4274 p
= rtvec_alloc (2);
4276 gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, dst
, op_res
);
4278 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_REG (CCmode
, CC_REGNUM
));
4279 emit_insn (gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, p
));
4284 /* Try SUBTRACT LOGICAL WITH BORROW. */
4285 if (increment
== constm1_rtx
)
4287 /* Determine CC mode to use. */
4288 if (cmp_code
== EQ
|| cmp_code
== NE
)
4290 if (cmp_op1
!= const0_rtx
)
4292 cmp_op0
= expand_simple_binop (cmp_mode
, XOR
, cmp_op0
, cmp_op1
,
4293 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4294 cmp_op1
= const0_rtx
;
4297 cmp_code
= cmp_code
== EQ
? LEU
: GTU
;
4300 if (cmp_code
== GTU
|| cmp_code
== GEU
)
4305 cmp_code
= swap_condition (cmp_code
);
4322 /* Emit comparison instruction pattern. */
4323 if (!register_operand (cmp_op0
, cmp_mode
))
4324 cmp_op0
= force_reg (cmp_mode
, cmp_op0
);
4326 insn
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_REG (cc_mode
, CC_REGNUM
),
4327 gen_rtx_COMPARE (cc_mode
, cmp_op0
, cmp_op1
));
4328 /* We use insn_invalid_p here to add clobbers if required. */
4329 ret
= insn_invalid_p (emit_insn (insn
));
4332 /* Emit SLB instruction pattern. */
4333 if (!register_operand (src
, GET_MODE (dst
)))
4334 src
= force_reg (GET_MODE (dst
), src
);
4336 op_res
= gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (dst
),
4337 gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (dst
), src
, const0_rtx
),
4338 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (cmp_code
, GET_MODE (dst
),
4339 gen_rtx_REG (cc_mode
, CC_REGNUM
),
4341 p
= rtvec_alloc (2);
4343 gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, dst
, op_res
);
4345 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_REG (CCmode
, CC_REGNUM
));
4346 emit_insn (gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, p
));
4354 /* Expand code for the insv template. Return true if successful. */
4357 s390_expand_insv (rtx dest
, rtx op1
, rtx op2
, rtx src
)
4359 int bitsize
= INTVAL (op1
);
4360 int bitpos
= INTVAL (op2
);
4362 /* On z10 we can use the risbg instruction to implement insv. */
4364 && ((GET_MODE (dest
) == DImode
&& GET_MODE (src
) == DImode
)
4365 || (GET_MODE (dest
) == SImode
&& GET_MODE (src
) == SImode
)))
4370 op
= gen_rtx_SET (GET_MODE(src
),
4371 gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTRACT (GET_MODE (dest
), dest
, op1
, op2
),
4373 clobber
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_REG (CCmode
, CC_REGNUM
));
4374 emit_insn (gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, gen_rtvec (2, op
, clobber
)));
4379 /* We need byte alignment. */
4380 if (bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
)
4384 && memory_operand (dest
, VOIDmode
)
4385 && (register_operand (src
, word_mode
)
4386 || const_int_operand (src
, VOIDmode
)))
4388 /* Emit standard pattern if possible. */
4389 enum machine_mode mode
= smallest_mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
);
4390 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == bitsize
)
4391 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
, mode
, 0), gen_lowpart (mode
, src
));
4393 /* (set (ze (mem)) (const_int)). */
4394 else if (const_int_operand (src
, VOIDmode
))
4396 int size
= bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4397 rtx src_mem
= adjust_address (force_const_mem (word_mode
, src
), BLKmode
,
4398 GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode
) - size
);
4400 dest
= adjust_address (dest
, BLKmode
, 0);
4401 set_mem_size (dest
, GEN_INT (size
));
4402 s390_expand_movmem (dest
, src_mem
, GEN_INT (size
));
4405 /* (set (ze (mem)) (reg)). */
4406 else if (register_operand (src
, word_mode
))
4408 if (bitsize
<= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (SImode
))
4409 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTRACT (word_mode
, dest
, op1
,
4413 /* Emit st,stcmh sequence. */
4414 int stcmh_width
= bitsize
- GET_MODE_BITSIZE (SImode
);
4415 int size
= stcmh_width
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4417 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
, SImode
, size
),
4418 gen_lowpart (SImode
, src
));
4419 set_mem_size (dest
, GEN_INT (size
));
4420 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTRACT (word_mode
, dest
, GEN_INT
4421 (stcmh_width
), const0_rtx
),
4422 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (word_mode
, src
, GEN_INT
4423 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (SImode
))));
4432 /* (set (ze (reg)) (const_int)). */
4434 && register_operand (dest
, word_mode
)
4435 && (bitpos
% 16) == 0
4436 && (bitsize
% 16) == 0
4437 && const_int_operand (src
, VOIDmode
))
4439 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (src
);
4440 int regpos
= bitpos
+ bitsize
;
4442 while (regpos
> bitpos
)
4444 enum machine_mode putmode
;
4447 if (TARGET_EXTIMM
&& (regpos
% 32 == 0) && (regpos
>= bitpos
+ 32))
4452 putsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (putmode
);
4454 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTRACT (word_mode
, dest
,
4457 gen_int_mode (val
, putmode
));
4460 gcc_assert (regpos
== bitpos
);
4467 /* A subroutine of s390_expand_cs_hqi and s390_expand_atomic which returns a
4468 register that holds VAL of mode MODE shifted by COUNT bits. */
4471 s390_expand_mask_and_shift (rtx val
, enum machine_mode mode
, rtx count
)
4473 val
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, AND
, val
, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)),
4474 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4475 return expand_simple_binop (SImode
, ASHIFT
, val
, count
,
4476 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4479 /* Structure to hold the initial parameters for a compare_and_swap operation
4480 in HImode and QImode. */
4482 struct alignment_context
4484 rtx memsi
; /* SI aligned memory location. */
4485 rtx shift
; /* Bit offset with regard to lsb. */
4486 rtx modemask
; /* Mask of the HQImode shifted by SHIFT bits. */
4487 rtx modemaski
; /* ~modemask */
4488 bool aligned
; /* True if memory is aligned, false else. */
4491 /* A subroutine of s390_expand_cs_hqi and s390_expand_atomic to initialize
4492 structure AC for transparent simplifying, if the memory alignment is known
4493 to be at least 32bit. MEM is the memory location for the actual operation
4494 and MODE its mode. */
4497 init_alignment_context (struct alignment_context
*ac
, rtx mem
,
4498 enum machine_mode mode
)
4500 ac
->shift
= GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode
) - GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
4501 ac
->aligned
= (MEM_ALIGN (mem
) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (SImode
));
4504 ac
->memsi
= adjust_address (mem
, SImode
, 0); /* Memory is aligned. */
4507 /* Alignment is unknown. */
4508 rtx byteoffset
, addr
, align
;
4510 /* Force the address into a register. */
4511 addr
= force_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (mem
, 0));
4513 /* Align it to SImode. */
4514 align
= expand_simple_binop (Pmode
, AND
, addr
,
4515 GEN_INT (-GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode
)),
4516 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4518 ac
->memsi
= gen_rtx_MEM (SImode
, align
);
4519 MEM_VOLATILE_P (ac
->memsi
) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem
);
4520 set_mem_alias_set (ac
->memsi
, ALIAS_SET_MEMORY_BARRIER
);
4521 set_mem_align (ac
->memsi
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (SImode
));
4523 /* Calculate shiftcount. */
4524 byteoffset
= expand_simple_binop (Pmode
, AND
, addr
,
4525 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode
) - 1),
4526 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4527 /* As we already have some offset, evaluate the remaining distance. */
4528 ac
->shift
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, MINUS
, ac
->shift
, byteoffset
,
4529 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4532 /* Shift is the byte count, but we need the bitcount. */
4533 ac
->shift
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, MULT
, ac
->shift
, GEN_INT (BITS_PER_UNIT
),
4534 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4535 /* Calculate masks. */
4536 ac
->modemask
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, ASHIFT
,
4537 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)), ac
->shift
,
4538 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4539 ac
->modemaski
= expand_simple_unop (SImode
, NOT
, ac
->modemask
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4542 /* Expand an atomic compare and swap operation for HImode and QImode. MEM is
4543 the memory location, CMP the old value to compare MEM with and NEW_RTX the value
4544 to set if CMP == MEM.
4545 CMP is never in memory for compare_and_swap_cc because
4546 expand_bool_compare_and_swap puts it into a register for later compare. */
4549 s390_expand_cs_hqi (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx target
, rtx mem
, rtx cmp
, rtx new_rtx
)
4551 struct alignment_context ac
;
4552 rtx cmpv
, newv
, val
, resv
, cc
;
4553 rtx res
= gen_reg_rtx (SImode
);
4554 rtx csloop
= gen_label_rtx ();
4555 rtx csend
= gen_label_rtx ();
4557 gcc_assert (register_operand (target
, VOIDmode
));
4558 gcc_assert (MEM_P (mem
));
4560 init_alignment_context (&ac
, mem
, mode
);
4562 /* Shift the values to the correct bit positions. */
4563 if (!(ac
.aligned
&& MEM_P (cmp
)))
4564 cmp
= s390_expand_mask_and_shift (cmp
, mode
, ac
.shift
);
4565 if (!(ac
.aligned
&& MEM_P (new_rtx
)))
4566 new_rtx
= s390_expand_mask_and_shift (new_rtx
, mode
, ac
.shift
);
4568 /* Load full word. Subsequent loads are performed by CS. */
4569 val
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, AND
, ac
.memsi
, ac
.modemaski
,
4570 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4572 /* Start CS loop. */
4573 emit_label (csloop
);
4574 /* val = "<mem>00..0<mem>"
4575 * cmp = "00..0<cmp>00..0"
4576 * new = "00..0<new>00..0"
4579 /* Patch cmp and new with val at correct position. */
4580 if (ac
.aligned
&& MEM_P (cmp
))
4582 cmpv
= force_reg (SImode
, val
);
4583 store_bit_field (cmpv
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
), 0, SImode
, cmp
);
4586 cmpv
= force_reg (SImode
, expand_simple_binop (SImode
, IOR
, cmp
, val
,
4587 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
));
4588 if (ac
.aligned
&& MEM_P (new_rtx
))
4590 newv
= force_reg (SImode
, val
);
4591 store_bit_field (newv
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
), 0, SImode
, new_rtx
);
4594 newv
= force_reg (SImode
, expand_simple_binop (SImode
, IOR
, new_rtx
, val
,
4595 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
));
4597 /* Jump to end if we're done (likely?). */
4598 s390_emit_jump (csend
, s390_emit_compare_and_swap (EQ
, res
, ac
.memsi
,
4601 /* Check for changes outside mode. */
4602 resv
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, AND
, res
, ac
.modemaski
,
4603 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4604 cc
= s390_emit_compare (NE
, resv
, val
);
4605 emit_move_insn (val
, resv
);
4606 /* Loop internal if so. */
4607 s390_emit_jump (csloop
, cc
);
4611 /* Return the correct part of the bitfield. */
4612 convert_move (target
, expand_simple_binop (SImode
, LSHIFTRT
, res
, ac
.shift
,
4613 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
), 1);
4616 /* Expand an atomic operation CODE of mode MODE. MEM is the memory location
4617 and VAL the value to play with. If AFTER is true then store the value
4618 MEM holds after the operation, if AFTER is false then store the value MEM
4619 holds before the operation. If TARGET is zero then discard that value, else
4620 store it to TARGET. */
4623 s390_expand_atomic (enum machine_mode mode
, enum rtx_code code
,
4624 rtx target
, rtx mem
, rtx val
, bool after
)
4626 struct alignment_context ac
;
4628 rtx new_rtx
= gen_reg_rtx (SImode
);
4629 rtx orig
= gen_reg_rtx (SImode
);
4630 rtx csloop
= gen_label_rtx ();
4632 gcc_assert (!target
|| register_operand (target
, VOIDmode
));
4633 gcc_assert (MEM_P (mem
));
4635 init_alignment_context (&ac
, mem
, mode
);
4637 /* Shift val to the correct bit positions.
4638 Preserve "icm", but prevent "ex icm". */
4639 if (!(ac
.aligned
&& code
== SET
&& MEM_P (val
)))
4640 val
= s390_expand_mask_and_shift (val
, mode
, ac
.shift
);
4642 /* Further preparation insns. */
4643 if (code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
)
4644 emit_move_insn (orig
, val
);
4645 else if (code
== MULT
|| code
== AND
) /* val = "11..1<val>11..1" */
4646 val
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, XOR
, val
, ac
.modemaski
,
4647 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4649 /* Load full word. Subsequent loads are performed by CS. */
4650 cmp
= force_reg (SImode
, ac
.memsi
);
4652 /* Start CS loop. */
4653 emit_label (csloop
);
4654 emit_move_insn (new_rtx
, cmp
);
4656 /* Patch new with val at correct position. */
4661 val
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, code
, new_rtx
, orig
,
4662 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4663 val
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, AND
, val
, ac
.modemask
,
4664 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4667 if (ac
.aligned
&& MEM_P (val
))
4668 store_bit_field (new_rtx
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
), 0, SImode
, val
);
4671 new_rtx
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, AND
, new_rtx
, ac
.modemaski
,
4672 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4673 new_rtx
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, IOR
, new_rtx
, val
,
4674 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4680 new_rtx
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, code
, new_rtx
, val
,
4681 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4683 case MULT
: /* NAND */
4684 new_rtx
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, AND
, new_rtx
, val
,
4685 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4686 new_rtx
= expand_simple_binop (SImode
, XOR
, new_rtx
, ac
.modemask
,
4687 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
);
4693 s390_emit_jump (csloop
, s390_emit_compare_and_swap (NE
, cmp
,
4694 ac
.memsi
, cmp
, new_rtx
));
4696 /* Return the correct part of the bitfield. */
4698 convert_move (target
, expand_simple_binop (SImode
, LSHIFTRT
,
4699 after
? new_rtx
: cmp
, ac
.shift
,
4700 NULL_RTX
, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT
), 1);
4703 /* This is called from dwarf2out.c via TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL.
4704 We need to emit DTP-relative relocations. */
4706 static void s390_output_dwarf_dtprel (FILE *, int, rtx
) ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
;
4709 s390_output_dwarf_dtprel (FILE *file
, int size
, rtx x
)
4714 fputs ("\t.long\t", file
);
4717 fputs ("\t.quad\t", file
);
4722 output_addr_const (file
, x
);
4723 fputs ("@DTPOFF", file
);
4726 #ifdef TARGET_ALTERNATE_LONG_DOUBLE_MANGLING
4727 /* Implement TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE. */
4730 s390_mangle_type (const_tree type
)
4732 if (TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (type
) == long_double_type_node
4733 && TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128
)
4736 /* For all other types, use normal C++ mangling. */
4741 /* In the name of slightly smaller debug output, and to cater to
4742 general assembler lossage, recognize various UNSPEC sequences
4743 and turn them back into a direct symbol reference. */
4746 s390_delegitimize_address (rtx orig_x
)
4750 if (GET_CODE (x
) != MEM
)
4754 if (GET_CODE (x
) == PLUS
4755 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == CONST
4756 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == REG
4757 && REGNO (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
)
4759 y
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0);
4760 if (GET_CODE (y
) == UNSPEC
4761 && XINT (y
, 1) == UNSPEC_GOT
)
4762 return XVECEXP (y
, 0, 0);
4766 if (GET_CODE (x
) == CONST
)
4769 if (GET_CODE (y
) == UNSPEC
4770 && XINT (y
, 1) == UNSPEC_GOTENT
)
4771 return XVECEXP (y
, 0, 0);
4778 /* Output operand OP to stdio stream FILE.
4779 OP is an address (register + offset) which is not used to address data;
4780 instead the rightmost bits are interpreted as the value. */
4783 print_shift_count_operand (FILE *file
, rtx op
)
4785 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
4788 /* Extract base register and offset. */
4789 if (!s390_decompose_shift_count (op
, &base
, &offset
))
4795 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (base
) == REG
);
4796 gcc_assert (REGNO (base
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
4797 gcc_assert (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (base
)) == ADDR_REGS
);
4800 /* Offsets are constricted to twelve bits. */
4801 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, offset
& ((1 << 12) - 1));
4803 fprintf (file
, "(%s)", reg_names
[REGNO (base
)]);
4806 /* See 'get_some_local_dynamic_name'. */
4809 get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx
*px
, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
4813 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SYMBOL_REF
&& CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (x
))
4815 x
= get_pool_constant (x
);
4816 return for_each_rtx (&x
, get_some_local_dynamic_name_1
, 0);
4819 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SYMBOL_REF
4820 && tls_symbolic_operand (x
) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC
)
4822 cfun
->machine
->some_ld_name
= XSTR (x
, 0);
4829 /* Locate some local-dynamic symbol still in use by this function
4830 so that we can print its name in local-dynamic base patterns. */
4833 get_some_local_dynamic_name (void)
4837 if (cfun
->machine
->some_ld_name
)
4838 return cfun
->machine
->some_ld_name
;
4840 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
4842 && for_each_rtx (&PATTERN (insn
), get_some_local_dynamic_name_1
, 0))
4843 return cfun
->machine
->some_ld_name
;
4848 /* Output machine-dependent UNSPECs occurring in address constant X
4849 in assembler syntax to stdio stream FILE. Returns true if the
4850 constant X could be recognized, false otherwise. */
4853 s390_output_addr_const_extra (FILE *file
, rtx x
)
4855 if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
&& XVECLEN (x
, 0) == 1)
4856 switch (XINT (x
, 1))
4859 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4860 fprintf (file
, "@GOTENT");
4863 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4864 fprintf (file
, "@GOT");
4867 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4868 fprintf (file
, "@GOTOFF");
4871 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4872 fprintf (file
, "@PLT");
4875 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4876 fprintf (file
, "@PLTOFF");
4879 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4880 fprintf (file
, "@TLSGD");
4883 assemble_name (file
, get_some_local_dynamic_name ());
4884 fprintf (file
, "@TLSLDM");
4887 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4888 fprintf (file
, "@DTPOFF");
4891 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4892 fprintf (file
, "@NTPOFF");
4894 case UNSPEC_GOTNTPOFF
:
4895 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4896 fprintf (file
, "@GOTNTPOFF");
4898 case UNSPEC_INDNTPOFF
:
4899 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4900 fprintf (file
, "@INDNTPOFF");
4904 if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
&& XVECLEN (x
, 0) == 2)
4905 switch (XINT (x
, 1))
4907 case UNSPEC_POOL_OFFSET
:
4908 x
= gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (x
), XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0), XVECEXP (x
, 0, 1));
4909 output_addr_const (file
, x
);
4915 /* Output address operand ADDR in assembler syntax to
4916 stdio stream FILE. */
4919 print_operand_address (FILE *file
, rtx addr
)
4921 struct s390_address ad
;
4923 if (s390_symref_operand_p (addr
, NULL
, NULL
))
4925 gcc_assert (TARGET_Z10
);
4926 output_addr_const (file
, addr
);
4930 if (!s390_decompose_address (addr
, &ad
)
4931 || (ad
.base
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (ad
.base
)))
4932 || (ad
.indx
&& !REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (REGNO (ad
.indx
))))
4933 output_operand_lossage ("cannot decompose address");
4936 output_addr_const (file
, ad
.disp
);
4938 fprintf (file
, "0");
4940 if (ad
.base
&& ad
.indx
)
4941 fprintf (file
, "(%s,%s)", reg_names
[REGNO (ad
.indx
)],
4942 reg_names
[REGNO (ad
.base
)]);
4944 fprintf (file
, "(%s)", reg_names
[REGNO (ad
.base
)]);
4947 /* Output operand X in assembler syntax to stdio stream FILE.
4948 CODE specified the format flag. The following format flags
4951 'C': print opcode suffix for branch condition.
4952 'D': print opcode suffix for inverse branch condition.
4953 'J': print tls_load/tls_gdcall/tls_ldcall suffix
4954 'G': print the size of the operand in bytes.
4955 'O': print only the displacement of a memory reference.
4956 'R': print only the base register of a memory reference.
4957 'S': print S-type memory reference (base+displacement).
4958 'N': print the second word of a DImode operand.
4959 'M': print the second word of a TImode operand.
4960 'Y': print shift count operand.
4962 'b': print integer X as if it's an unsigned byte.
4963 'c': print integer X as if it's an signed byte.
4964 'x': print integer X as if it's an unsigned halfword.
4965 'h': print integer X as if it's a signed halfword.
4966 'i': print the first nonzero HImode part of X.
4967 'j': print the first HImode part unequal to -1 of X.
4968 'k': print the first nonzero SImode part of X.
4969 'm': print the first SImode part unequal to -1 of X.
4970 'o': print integer X as if it's an unsigned 32bit word. */
4973 print_operand (FILE *file
, rtx x
, int code
)
4978 fprintf (file
, s390_branch_condition_mnemonic (x
, FALSE
));
4982 fprintf (file
, s390_branch_condition_mnemonic (x
, TRUE
));
4986 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SYMBOL_REF
)
4988 fprintf (file
, "%s", ":tls_load:");
4989 output_addr_const (file
, x
);
4991 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
&& XINT (x
, 1) == UNSPEC_TLSGD
)
4993 fprintf (file
, "%s", ":tls_gdcall:");
4994 output_addr_const (file
, XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0));
4996 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
&& XINT (x
, 1) == UNSPEC_TLSLDM
)
4998 fprintf (file
, "%s", ":tls_ldcall:");
4999 assemble_name (file
, get_some_local_dynamic_name ());
5006 fprintf (file
, "%u", GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
)));
5011 struct s390_address ad
;
5014 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
);
5015 ret
= s390_decompose_address (XEXP (x
, 0), &ad
);
5017 gcc_assert (!ad
.base
|| REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (ad
.base
)));
5018 gcc_assert (!ad
.indx
);
5021 output_addr_const (file
, ad
.disp
);
5023 fprintf (file
, "0");
5029 struct s390_address ad
;
5032 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
);
5033 ret
= s390_decompose_address (XEXP (x
, 0), &ad
);
5035 gcc_assert (!ad
.base
|| REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (ad
.base
)));
5036 gcc_assert (!ad
.indx
);
5039 fprintf (file
, "%s", reg_names
[REGNO (ad
.base
)]);
5041 fprintf (file
, "0");
5047 struct s390_address ad
;
5050 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
);
5051 ret
= s390_decompose_address (XEXP (x
, 0), &ad
);
5053 gcc_assert (!ad
.base
|| REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (ad
.base
)));
5054 gcc_assert (!ad
.indx
);
5057 output_addr_const (file
, ad
.disp
);
5059 fprintf (file
, "0");
5062 fprintf (file
, "(%s)", reg_names
[REGNO (ad
.base
)]);
5067 if (GET_CODE (x
) == REG
)
5068 x
= gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (x
), REGNO (x
) + 1);
5069 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
)
5070 x
= change_address (x
, VOIDmode
, plus_constant (XEXP (x
, 0), 4));
5076 if (GET_CODE (x
) == REG
)
5077 x
= gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (x
), REGNO (x
) + 1);
5078 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
)
5079 x
= change_address (x
, VOIDmode
, plus_constant (XEXP (x
, 0), 8));
5085 print_shift_count_operand (file
, x
);
5089 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
5092 fprintf (file
, "%s", reg_names
[REGNO (x
)]);
5096 output_address (XEXP (x
, 0));
5103 output_addr_const (file
, x
);
5108 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, INTVAL (x
) & 0xff);
5109 else if (code
== 'c')
5110 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, ((INTVAL (x
) & 0xff) ^ 0x80) - 0x80);
5111 else if (code
== 'x')
5112 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, INTVAL (x
) & 0xffff);
5113 else if (code
== 'h')
5114 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, ((INTVAL (x
) & 0xffff) ^ 0x8000) - 0x8000);
5115 else if (code
== 'i')
5116 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
,
5117 s390_extract_part (x
, HImode
, 0));
5118 else if (code
== 'j')
5119 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
,
5120 s390_extract_part (x
, HImode
, -1));
5121 else if (code
== 'k')
5122 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
,
5123 s390_extract_part (x
, SImode
, 0));
5124 else if (code
== 'm')
5125 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
,
5126 s390_extract_part (x
, SImode
, -1));
5127 else if (code
== 'o')
5128 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, INTVAL (x
) & 0xffffffff);
5130 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, INTVAL (x
));
5134 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (x
) == VOIDmode
);
5136 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x
) & 0xff);
5137 else if (code
== 'x')
5138 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x
) & 0xffff);
5139 else if (code
== 'h')
5140 fprintf (file
, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
, ((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x
) & 0xffff) ^ 0x8000) - 0x8000);
5146 fatal_insn ("UNKNOWN in print_operand !?", x
);
5151 /* Target hook for assembling integer objects. We need to define it
5152 here to work a round a bug in some versions of GAS, which couldn't
5153 handle values smaller than INT_MIN when printed in decimal. */
5156 s390_assemble_integer (rtx x
, unsigned int size
, int aligned_p
)
5158 if (size
== 8 && aligned_p
5159 && GET_CODE (x
) == CONST_INT
&& INTVAL (x
) < INT_MIN
)
5161 fprintf (asm_out_file
, "\t.quad\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_HEX
"\n",
5165 return default_assemble_integer (x
, size
, aligned_p
);
5168 /* Returns true if register REGNO is used for forming
5169 a memory address in expression X. */
5172 reg_used_in_mem_p (int regno
, rtx x
)
5174 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5180 if (refers_to_regno_p (regno
, regno
+1,
5184 else if (code
== SET
5185 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == PC
)
5187 if (refers_to_regno_p (regno
, regno
+1,
5192 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
5193 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
5196 && reg_used_in_mem_p (regno
, XEXP (x
, i
)))
5199 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
5200 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
5201 if (reg_used_in_mem_p (regno
, XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
)))
5207 /* Returns true if expression DEP_RTX sets an address register
5208 used by instruction INSN to address memory. */
5211 addr_generation_dependency_p (rtx dep_rtx
, rtx insn
)
5215 if (GET_CODE (dep_rtx
) == INSN
)
5216 dep_rtx
= PATTERN (dep_rtx
);
5218 if (GET_CODE (dep_rtx
) == SET
)
5220 target
= SET_DEST (dep_rtx
);
5221 if (GET_CODE (target
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
5222 target
= XEXP (target
, 0);
5223 while (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
)
5224 target
= SUBREG_REG (target
);
5226 if (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
)
5228 int regno
= REGNO (target
);
5230 if (s390_safe_attr_type (insn
) == TYPE_LA
)
5232 pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
5233 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
5235 gcc_assert (XVECLEN (pat
, 0) == 2);
5236 pat
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 0);
5238 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
);
5239 return refers_to_regno_p (regno
, regno
+1, SET_SRC (pat
), 0);
5241 else if (get_attr_atype (insn
) == ATYPE_AGEN
)
5242 return reg_used_in_mem_p (regno
, PATTERN (insn
));
5248 /* Return 1, if dep_insn sets register used in insn in the agen unit. */
5251 s390_agen_dep_p (rtx dep_insn
, rtx insn
)
5253 rtx dep_rtx
= PATTERN (dep_insn
);
5256 if (GET_CODE (dep_rtx
) == SET
5257 && addr_generation_dependency_p (dep_rtx
, insn
))
5259 else if (GET_CODE (dep_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
5261 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (dep_rtx
, 0); i
++)
5263 if (addr_generation_dependency_p (XVECEXP (dep_rtx
, 0, i
), insn
))
5271 /* A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling priority
5272 INSN_PRIORITY (INSN). Increase the priority to execute the INSN earlier,
5273 reduce the priority to execute INSN later. Do not define this macro if
5274 you do not need to adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
5276 A STD instruction should be scheduled earlier,
5277 in order to use the bypass. */
5280 s390_adjust_priority (rtx insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, int priority
)
5282 if (! INSN_P (insn
))
5285 if (s390_tune
!= PROCESSOR_2084_Z990
5286 && s390_tune
!= PROCESSOR_2094_Z9_109
)
5289 switch (s390_safe_attr_type (insn
))
5293 priority
= priority
<< 3;
5297 priority
= priority
<< 1;
5305 /* The number of instructions that can be issued per cycle. */
5308 s390_issue_rate (void)
5312 case PROCESSOR_2084_Z990
:
5313 case PROCESSOR_2094_Z9_109
:
5315 case PROCESSOR_2097_Z10
:
5323 s390_first_cycle_multipass_dfa_lookahead (void)
5329 /* Annotate every literal pool reference in X by an UNSPEC_LTREF expression.
5330 Fix up MEMs as required. */
5333 annotate_constant_pool_refs (rtx
*x
)
5338 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (*x
) != SYMBOL_REF
5339 || !CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (*x
));
5341 /* Literal pool references can only occur inside a MEM ... */
5342 if (GET_CODE (*x
) == MEM
)
5344 rtx memref
= XEXP (*x
, 0);
5346 if (GET_CODE (memref
) == SYMBOL_REF
5347 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (memref
))
5349 rtx base
= cfun
->machine
->base_reg
;
5350 rtx addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, memref
, base
),
5353 *x
= replace_equiv_address (*x
, addr
);
5357 if (GET_CODE (memref
) == CONST
5358 && GET_CODE (XEXP (memref
, 0)) == PLUS
5359 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (memref
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
5360 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (memref
, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
5361 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (XEXP (memref
, 0), 0)))
5363 HOST_WIDE_INT off
= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (memref
, 0), 1));
5364 rtx sym
= XEXP (XEXP (memref
, 0), 0);
5365 rtx base
= cfun
->machine
->base_reg
;
5366 rtx addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, sym
, base
),
5369 *x
= replace_equiv_address (*x
, plus_constant (addr
, off
));
5374 /* ... or a load-address type pattern. */
5375 if (GET_CODE (*x
) == SET
)
5377 rtx addrref
= SET_SRC (*x
);
5379 if (GET_CODE (addrref
) == SYMBOL_REF
5380 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (addrref
))
5382 rtx base
= cfun
->machine
->base_reg
;
5383 rtx addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, addrref
, base
),
5386 SET_SRC (*x
) = addr
;
5390 if (GET_CODE (addrref
) == CONST
5391 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addrref
, 0)) == PLUS
5392 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addrref
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
5393 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addrref
, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
5394 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (XEXP (addrref
, 0), 0)))
5396 HOST_WIDE_INT off
= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addrref
, 0), 1));
5397 rtx sym
= XEXP (XEXP (addrref
, 0), 0);
5398 rtx base
= cfun
->machine
->base_reg
;
5399 rtx addr
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, sym
, base
),
5402 SET_SRC (*x
) = plus_constant (addr
, off
);
5407 /* Annotate LTREL_BASE as well. */
5408 if (GET_CODE (*x
) == UNSPEC
5409 && XINT (*x
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE
)
5411 rtx base
= cfun
->machine
->base_reg
;
5412 *x
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, XVECEXP (*x
, 0, 0), base
),
5417 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (*x
));
5418 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (*x
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
5422 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&XEXP (*x
, i
));
5424 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
5426 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (*x
, i
); j
++)
5427 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&XVECEXP (*x
, i
, j
));
5432 /* Split all branches that exceed the maximum distance.
5433 Returns true if this created a new literal pool entry. */
5436 s390_split_branches (void)
5438 rtx temp_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
);
5439 int new_literal
= 0, ret
;
5440 rtx insn
, pat
, tmp
, target
;
5443 /* We need correct insn addresses. */
5445 shorten_branches (get_insns ());
5447 /* Find all branches that exceed 64KB, and split them. */
5449 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
5451 if (GET_CODE (insn
) != JUMP_INSN
)
5454 pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
5455 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
&& XVECLEN (pat
, 0) > 2)
5456 pat
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 0);
5457 if (GET_CODE (pat
) != SET
|| SET_DEST (pat
) != pc_rtx
)
5460 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat
)) == LABEL_REF
)
5462 label
= &SET_SRC (pat
);
5464 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat
)) == IF_THEN_ELSE
)
5466 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (pat
), 1)) == LABEL_REF
)
5467 label
= &XEXP (SET_SRC (pat
), 1);
5468 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (pat
), 2)) == LABEL_REF
)
5469 label
= &XEXP (SET_SRC (pat
), 2);
5476 if (get_attr_length (insn
) <= 4)
5479 /* We are going to use the return register as scratch register,
5480 make sure it will be saved/restored by the prologue/epilogue. */
5481 cfun_frame_layout
.save_return_addr_p
= 1;
5486 tmp
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, *label
);
5487 tmp
= emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_SET (Pmode
, temp_reg
, tmp
), insn
);
5488 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (tmp
, -1);
5489 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&PATTERN (tmp
));
5496 target
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, *label
),
5497 UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
);
5498 target
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, target
);
5499 target
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, target
);
5500 tmp
= emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_SET (Pmode
, temp_reg
, target
), insn
);
5501 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (tmp
, -1);
5502 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&PATTERN (tmp
));
5504 target
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (2, XEXP (target
, 0),
5505 cfun
->machine
->base_reg
),
5507 target
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, temp_reg
, target
);
5510 ret
= validate_change (insn
, label
, target
, 0);
5518 /* Find an annotated literal pool symbol referenced in RTX X,
5519 and store it at REF. Will abort if X contains references to
5520 more than one such pool symbol; multiple references to the same
5521 symbol are allowed, however.
5523 The rtx pointed to by REF must be initialized to NULL_RTX
5524 by the caller before calling this routine. */
5527 find_constant_pool_ref (rtx x
, rtx
*ref
)
5532 /* Ignore LTREL_BASE references. */
5533 if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
5534 && XINT (x
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE
)
5536 /* Likewise POOL_ENTRY insns. */
5537 if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE
5538 && XINT (x
, 1) == UNSPECV_POOL_ENTRY
)
5541 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x
) != SYMBOL_REF
5542 || !CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (x
));
5544 if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
&& XINT (x
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREF
)
5546 rtx sym
= XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0);
5547 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (sym
) == SYMBOL_REF
5548 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (sym
));
5550 if (*ref
== NULL_RTX
)
5553 gcc_assert (*ref
== sym
);
5558 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x
));
5559 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
5563 find_constant_pool_ref (XEXP (x
, i
), ref
);
5565 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
5567 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
5568 find_constant_pool_ref (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), ref
);
5573 /* Replace every reference to the annotated literal pool
5574 symbol REF in X by its base plus OFFSET. */
5577 replace_constant_pool_ref (rtx
*x
, rtx ref
, rtx offset
)
5582 gcc_assert (*x
!= ref
);
5584 if (GET_CODE (*x
) == UNSPEC
5585 && XINT (*x
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREF
5586 && XVECEXP (*x
, 0, 0) == ref
)
5588 *x
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, XVECEXP (*x
, 0, 1), offset
);
5592 if (GET_CODE (*x
) == PLUS
5593 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*x
, 1)) == CONST_INT
5594 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*x
, 0)) == UNSPEC
5595 && XINT (XEXP (*x
, 0), 1) == UNSPEC_LTREF
5596 && XVECEXP (XEXP (*x
, 0), 0, 0) == ref
)
5598 rtx addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, XVECEXP (XEXP (*x
, 0), 0, 1), offset
);
5599 *x
= plus_constant (addr
, INTVAL (XEXP (*x
, 1)));
5603 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (*x
));
5604 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (*x
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
5608 replace_constant_pool_ref (&XEXP (*x
, i
), ref
, offset
);
5610 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
5612 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (*x
, i
); j
++)
5613 replace_constant_pool_ref (&XVECEXP (*x
, i
, j
), ref
, offset
);
5618 /* Check whether X contains an UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE.
5619 Return its constant pool symbol if found, NULL_RTX otherwise. */
5622 find_ltrel_base (rtx x
)
5627 if (GET_CODE (x
) == UNSPEC
5628 && XINT (x
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE
)
5629 return XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0);
5631 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x
));
5632 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
5636 rtx fnd
= find_ltrel_base (XEXP (x
, i
));
5640 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
5642 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
5644 rtx fnd
= find_ltrel_base (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
5654 /* Replace any occurrence of UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE in X with its base. */
5657 replace_ltrel_base (rtx
*x
)
5662 if (GET_CODE (*x
) == UNSPEC
5663 && XINT (*x
, 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_BASE
)
5665 *x
= XVECEXP (*x
, 0, 1);
5669 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (*x
));
5670 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (*x
)) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
5674 replace_ltrel_base (&XEXP (*x
, i
));
5676 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
5678 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (*x
, i
); j
++)
5679 replace_ltrel_base (&XVECEXP (*x
, i
, j
));
5685 /* We keep a list of constants which we have to add to internal
5686 constant tables in the middle of large functions. */
5688 #define NR_C_MODES 11
5689 enum machine_mode constant_modes
[NR_C_MODES
] =
5691 TFmode
, TImode
, TDmode
,
5692 DFmode
, DImode
, DDmode
,
5693 SFmode
, SImode
, SDmode
,
5700 struct constant
*next
;
5705 struct constant_pool
5707 struct constant_pool
*next
;
5711 rtx emit_pool_after
;
5713 struct constant
*constants
[NR_C_MODES
];
5714 struct constant
*execute
;
5719 /* Allocate new constant_pool structure. */
5721 static struct constant_pool
*
5722 s390_alloc_pool (void)
5724 struct constant_pool
*pool
;
5727 pool
= (struct constant_pool
*) xmalloc (sizeof *pool
);
5729 for (i
= 0; i
< NR_C_MODES
; i
++)
5730 pool
->constants
[i
] = NULL
;
5732 pool
->execute
= NULL
;
5733 pool
->label
= gen_label_rtx ();
5734 pool
->first_insn
= NULL_RTX
;
5735 pool
->pool_insn
= NULL_RTX
;
5736 pool
->insns
= BITMAP_ALLOC (NULL
);
5738 pool
->emit_pool_after
= NULL_RTX
;
5743 /* Create new constant pool covering instructions starting at INSN
5744 and chain it to the end of POOL_LIST. */
5746 static struct constant_pool
*
5747 s390_start_pool (struct constant_pool
**pool_list
, rtx insn
)
5749 struct constant_pool
*pool
, **prev
;
5751 pool
= s390_alloc_pool ();
5752 pool
->first_insn
= insn
;
5754 for (prev
= pool_list
; *prev
; prev
= &(*prev
)->next
)
5761 /* End range of instructions covered by POOL at INSN and emit
5762 placeholder insn representing the pool. */
5765 s390_end_pool (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx insn
)
5767 rtx pool_size
= GEN_INT (pool
->size
+ 8 /* alignment slop */);
5770 insn
= get_last_insn ();
5772 pool
->pool_insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool (pool_size
), insn
);
5773 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (pool
->pool_insn
, -1);
5776 /* Add INSN to the list of insns covered by POOL. */
5779 s390_add_pool_insn (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx insn
)
5781 bitmap_set_bit (pool
->insns
, INSN_UID (insn
));
5784 /* Return pool out of POOL_LIST that covers INSN. */
5786 static struct constant_pool
*
5787 s390_find_pool (struct constant_pool
*pool_list
, rtx insn
)
5789 struct constant_pool
*pool
;
5791 for (pool
= pool_list
; pool
; pool
= pool
->next
)
5792 if (bitmap_bit_p (pool
->insns
, INSN_UID (insn
)))
5798 /* Add constant VAL of mode MODE to the constant pool POOL. */
5801 s390_add_constant (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx val
, enum machine_mode mode
)
5806 for (i
= 0; i
< NR_C_MODES
; i
++)
5807 if (constant_modes
[i
] == mode
)
5809 gcc_assert (i
!= NR_C_MODES
);
5811 for (c
= pool
->constants
[i
]; c
!= NULL
; c
= c
->next
)
5812 if (rtx_equal_p (val
, c
->value
))
5817 c
= (struct constant
*) xmalloc (sizeof *c
);
5819 c
->label
= gen_label_rtx ();
5820 c
->next
= pool
->constants
[i
];
5821 pool
->constants
[i
] = c
;
5822 pool
->size
+= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
5826 /* Return an rtx that represents the offset of X from the start of
5830 s390_pool_offset (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx x
)
5834 label
= gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (GET_MODE (x
), pool
->label
);
5835 x
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (GET_MODE (x
), gen_rtvec (2, x
, label
),
5836 UNSPEC_POOL_OFFSET
);
5837 return gen_rtx_CONST (GET_MODE (x
), x
);
5840 /* Find constant VAL of mode MODE in the constant pool POOL.
5841 Return an RTX describing the distance from the start of
5842 the pool to the location of the new constant. */
5845 s390_find_constant (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx val
,
5846 enum machine_mode mode
)
5851 for (i
= 0; i
< NR_C_MODES
; i
++)
5852 if (constant_modes
[i
] == mode
)
5854 gcc_assert (i
!= NR_C_MODES
);
5856 for (c
= pool
->constants
[i
]; c
!= NULL
; c
= c
->next
)
5857 if (rtx_equal_p (val
, c
->value
))
5862 return s390_pool_offset (pool
, gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, c
->label
));
5865 /* Check whether INSN is an execute. Return the label_ref to its
5866 execute target template if so, NULL_RTX otherwise. */
5869 s390_execute_label (rtx insn
)
5871 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
5872 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == PARALLEL
5873 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0)) == UNSPEC
5874 && XINT (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0), 1) == UNSPEC_EXECUTE
)
5875 return XVECEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0), 0, 2);
5880 /* Add execute target for INSN to the constant pool POOL. */
5883 s390_add_execute (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx insn
)
5887 for (c
= pool
->execute
; c
!= NULL
; c
= c
->next
)
5888 if (INSN_UID (insn
) == INSN_UID (c
->value
))
5893 c
= (struct constant
*) xmalloc (sizeof *c
);
5895 c
->label
= gen_label_rtx ();
5896 c
->next
= pool
->execute
;
5902 /* Find execute target for INSN in the constant pool POOL.
5903 Return an RTX describing the distance from the start of
5904 the pool to the location of the execute target. */
5907 s390_find_execute (struct constant_pool
*pool
, rtx insn
)
5911 for (c
= pool
->execute
; c
!= NULL
; c
= c
->next
)
5912 if (INSN_UID (insn
) == INSN_UID (c
->value
))
5917 return s390_pool_offset (pool
, gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, c
->label
));
5920 /* For an execute INSN, extract the execute target template. */
5923 s390_execute_target (rtx insn
)
5925 rtx pattern
= PATTERN (insn
);
5926 gcc_assert (s390_execute_label (insn
));
5928 if (XVECLEN (pattern
, 0) == 2)
5930 pattern
= copy_rtx (XVECEXP (pattern
, 0, 1));
5934 rtvec vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (pattern
, 0) - 1);
5937 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pattern
, 0) - 1; i
++)
5938 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = copy_rtx (XVECEXP (pattern
, 0, i
+ 1));
5940 pattern
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, vec
);
5946 /* Indicate that INSN cannot be duplicated. This is the case for
5947 execute insns that carry a unique label. */
5950 s390_cannot_copy_insn_p (rtx insn
)
5952 rtx label
= s390_execute_label (insn
);
5953 return label
&& label
!= const0_rtx
;
5956 /* Dump out the constants in POOL. If REMOTE_LABEL is true,
5957 do not emit the pool base label. */
5960 s390_dump_pool (struct constant_pool
*pool
, bool remote_label
)
5963 rtx insn
= pool
->pool_insn
;
5966 /* Switch to rodata section. */
5967 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
5969 insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool_section_start (), insn
);
5970 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
5973 /* Ensure minimum pool alignment. */
5974 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
5975 insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool_align (GEN_INT (8)), insn
);
5977 insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool_align (GEN_INT (4)), insn
);
5978 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
5980 /* Emit pool base label. */
5983 insn
= emit_label_after (pool
->label
, insn
);
5984 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
5987 /* Dump constants in descending alignment requirement order,
5988 ensuring proper alignment for every constant. */
5989 for (i
= 0; i
< NR_C_MODES
; i
++)
5990 for (c
= pool
->constants
[i
]; c
; c
= c
->next
)
5992 /* Convert UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET unspecs to pool-relative references. */
5993 rtx value
= copy_rtx (c
->value
);
5994 if (GET_CODE (value
) == CONST
5995 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 0)) == UNSPEC
5996 && XINT (XEXP (value
, 0), 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
5997 && XVECLEN (XEXP (value
, 0), 0) == 1)
5998 value
= s390_pool_offset (pool
, XVECEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0, 0));
6000 insn
= emit_label_after (c
->label
, insn
);
6001 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6003 value
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC_VOLATILE (constant_modes
[i
],
6004 gen_rtvec (1, value
),
6005 UNSPECV_POOL_ENTRY
);
6006 insn
= emit_insn_after (value
, insn
);
6007 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6010 /* Ensure minimum alignment for instructions. */
6011 insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool_align (GEN_INT (2)), insn
);
6012 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6014 /* Output in-pool execute template insns. */
6015 for (c
= pool
->execute
; c
; c
= c
->next
)
6017 insn
= emit_label_after (c
->label
, insn
);
6018 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6020 insn
= emit_insn_after (s390_execute_target (c
->value
), insn
);
6021 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6024 /* Switch back to previous section. */
6025 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
6027 insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool_section_end (), insn
);
6028 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6031 insn
= emit_barrier_after (insn
);
6032 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6034 /* Remove placeholder insn. */
6035 remove_insn (pool
->pool_insn
);
6038 /* Free all memory used by POOL. */
6041 s390_free_pool (struct constant_pool
*pool
)
6043 struct constant
*c
, *next
;
6046 for (i
= 0; i
< NR_C_MODES
; i
++)
6047 for (c
= pool
->constants
[i
]; c
; c
= next
)
6053 for (c
= pool
->execute
; c
; c
= next
)
6059 BITMAP_FREE (pool
->insns
);
6064 /* Collect main literal pool. Return NULL on overflow. */
6066 static struct constant_pool
*
6067 s390_mainpool_start (void)
6069 struct constant_pool
*pool
;
6072 pool
= s390_alloc_pool ();
6074 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
6076 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
6077 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
6078 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE
6079 && XINT (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
)), 1) == UNSPECV_MAIN_POOL
)
6081 gcc_assert (!pool
->pool_insn
);
6082 pool
->pool_insn
= insn
;
6085 if (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
&& s390_execute_label (insn
))
6087 s390_add_execute (pool
, insn
);
6089 else if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
|| GET_CODE (insn
) == CALL_INSN
)
6091 rtx pool_ref
= NULL_RTX
;
6092 find_constant_pool_ref (PATTERN (insn
), &pool_ref
);
6095 rtx constant
= get_pool_constant (pool_ref
);
6096 enum machine_mode mode
= get_pool_mode (pool_ref
);
6097 s390_add_constant (pool
, constant
, mode
);
6101 /* If hot/cold partitioning is enabled we have to make sure that
6102 the literal pool is emitted in the same section where the
6103 initialization of the literal pool base pointer takes place.
6104 emit_pool_after is only used in the non-overflow case on non
6105 Z cpus where we can emit the literal pool at the end of the
6106 function body within the text section. */
6108 && NOTE_KIND (insn
) == NOTE_INSN_SWITCH_TEXT_SECTIONS
6109 && !pool
->emit_pool_after
)
6110 pool
->emit_pool_after
= PREV_INSN (insn
);
6113 gcc_assert (pool
->pool_insn
|| pool
->size
== 0);
6115 if (pool
->size
>= 4096)
6117 /* We're going to chunkify the pool, so remove the main
6118 pool placeholder insn. */
6119 remove_insn (pool
->pool_insn
);
6121 s390_free_pool (pool
);
6125 /* If the functions ends with the section where the literal pool
6126 should be emitted set the marker to its end. */
6127 if (pool
&& !pool
->emit_pool_after
)
6128 pool
->emit_pool_after
= get_last_insn ();
6133 /* POOL holds the main literal pool as collected by s390_mainpool_start.
6134 Modify the current function to output the pool constants as well as
6135 the pool register setup instruction. */
6138 s390_mainpool_finish (struct constant_pool
*pool
)
6140 rtx base_reg
= cfun
->machine
->base_reg
;
6143 /* If the pool is empty, we're done. */
6144 if (pool
->size
== 0)
6146 /* We don't actually need a base register after all. */
6147 cfun
->machine
->base_reg
= NULL_RTX
;
6149 if (pool
->pool_insn
)
6150 remove_insn (pool
->pool_insn
);
6151 s390_free_pool (pool
);
6155 /* We need correct insn addresses. */
6156 shorten_branches (get_insns ());
6158 /* On zSeries, we use a LARL to load the pool register. The pool is
6159 located in the .rodata section, so we emit it after the function. */
6160 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
6162 insn
= gen_main_base_64 (base_reg
, pool
->label
);
6163 insn
= emit_insn_after (insn
, pool
->pool_insn
);
6164 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6165 remove_insn (pool
->pool_insn
);
6167 insn
= get_last_insn ();
6168 pool
->pool_insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool (const0_rtx
), insn
);
6169 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (pool
->pool_insn
, -1);
6171 s390_dump_pool (pool
, 0);
6174 /* On S/390, if the total size of the function's code plus literal pool
6175 does not exceed 4096 bytes, we use BASR to set up a function base
6176 pointer, and emit the literal pool at the end of the function. */
6177 else if (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (pool
->emit_pool_after
))
6178 + pool
->size
+ 8 /* alignment slop */ < 4096)
6180 insn
= gen_main_base_31_small (base_reg
, pool
->label
);
6181 insn
= emit_insn_after (insn
, pool
->pool_insn
);
6182 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6183 remove_insn (pool
->pool_insn
);
6185 insn
= emit_label_after (pool
->label
, insn
);
6186 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6188 /* emit_pool_after will be set by s390_mainpool_start to the
6189 last insn of the section where the literal pool should be
6191 insn
= pool
->emit_pool_after
;
6193 pool
->pool_insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool (const0_rtx
), insn
);
6194 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (pool
->pool_insn
, -1);
6196 s390_dump_pool (pool
, 1);
6199 /* Otherwise, we emit an inline literal pool and use BASR to branch
6200 over it, setting up the pool register at the same time. */
6203 rtx pool_end
= gen_label_rtx ();
6205 insn
= gen_main_base_31_large (base_reg
, pool
->label
, pool_end
);
6206 insn
= emit_insn_after (insn
, pool
->pool_insn
);
6207 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6208 remove_insn (pool
->pool_insn
);
6210 insn
= emit_label_after (pool
->label
, insn
);
6211 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6213 pool
->pool_insn
= emit_insn_after (gen_pool (const0_rtx
), insn
);
6214 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (pool
->pool_insn
, -1);
6216 insn
= emit_label_after (pool_end
, pool
->pool_insn
);
6217 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6219 s390_dump_pool (pool
, 1);
6223 /* Replace all literal pool references. */
6225 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
6228 replace_ltrel_base (&PATTERN (insn
));
6230 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
|| GET_CODE (insn
) == CALL_INSN
)
6232 rtx addr
, pool_ref
= NULL_RTX
;
6233 find_constant_pool_ref (PATTERN (insn
), &pool_ref
);
6236 if (s390_execute_label (insn
))
6237 addr
= s390_find_execute (pool
, insn
);
6239 addr
= s390_find_constant (pool
, get_pool_constant (pool_ref
),
6240 get_pool_mode (pool_ref
));
6242 replace_constant_pool_ref (&PATTERN (insn
), pool_ref
, addr
);
6243 INSN_CODE (insn
) = -1;
6249 /* Free the pool. */
6250 s390_free_pool (pool
);
6253 /* POOL holds the main literal pool as collected by s390_mainpool_start.
6254 We have decided we cannot use this pool, so revert all changes
6255 to the current function that were done by s390_mainpool_start. */
6257 s390_mainpool_cancel (struct constant_pool
*pool
)
6259 /* We didn't actually change the instruction stream, so simply
6260 free the pool memory. */
6261 s390_free_pool (pool
);
6265 /* Chunkify the literal pool. */
6267 #define S390_POOL_CHUNK_MIN 0xc00
6268 #define S390_POOL_CHUNK_MAX 0xe00
6270 static struct constant_pool
*
6271 s390_chunkify_start (void)
6273 struct constant_pool
*curr_pool
= NULL
, *pool_list
= NULL
;
6276 rtx pending_ltrel
= NULL_RTX
;
6279 rtx (*gen_reload_base
) (rtx
, rtx
) =
6280 TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
? gen_reload_base_64
: gen_reload_base_31
;
6283 /* We need correct insn addresses. */
6285 shorten_branches (get_insns ());
6287 /* Scan all insns and move literals to pool chunks. */
6289 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
6291 bool section_switch_p
= false;
6293 /* Check for pending LTREL_BASE. */
6296 rtx ltrel_base
= find_ltrel_base (PATTERN (insn
));
6299 gcc_assert (ltrel_base
== pending_ltrel
);
6300 pending_ltrel
= NULL_RTX
;
6304 if (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
&& s390_execute_label (insn
))
6307 curr_pool
= s390_start_pool (&pool_list
, insn
);
6309 s390_add_execute (curr_pool
, insn
);
6310 s390_add_pool_insn (curr_pool
, insn
);
6312 else if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
|| GET_CODE (insn
) == CALL_INSN
)
6314 rtx pool_ref
= NULL_RTX
;
6315 find_constant_pool_ref (PATTERN (insn
), &pool_ref
);
6318 rtx constant
= get_pool_constant (pool_ref
);
6319 enum machine_mode mode
= get_pool_mode (pool_ref
);
6322 curr_pool
= s390_start_pool (&pool_list
, insn
);
6324 s390_add_constant (curr_pool
, constant
, mode
);
6325 s390_add_pool_insn (curr_pool
, insn
);
6327 /* Don't split the pool chunk between a LTREL_OFFSET load
6328 and the corresponding LTREL_BASE. */
6329 if (GET_CODE (constant
) == CONST
6330 && GET_CODE (XEXP (constant
, 0)) == UNSPEC
6331 && XINT (XEXP (constant
, 0), 1) == UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
)
6333 gcc_assert (!pending_ltrel
);
6334 pending_ltrel
= pool_ref
;
6339 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == JUMP_INSN
|| GET_CODE (insn
) == CODE_LABEL
)
6342 s390_add_pool_insn (curr_pool
, insn
);
6343 /* An LTREL_BASE must follow within the same basic block. */
6344 gcc_assert (!pending_ltrel
);
6347 if (NOTE_P (insn
) && NOTE_KIND (insn
) == NOTE_INSN_SWITCH_TEXT_SECTIONS
)
6348 section_switch_p
= true;
6351 || INSN_ADDRESSES_SIZE () <= (size_t) INSN_UID (insn
)
6352 || INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn
)) == -1)
6355 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
6357 if (curr_pool
->size
< S390_POOL_CHUNK_MAX
)
6360 s390_end_pool (curr_pool
, NULL_RTX
);
6365 int chunk_size
= INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn
))
6366 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (curr_pool
->first_insn
))
6369 /* We will later have to insert base register reload insns.
6370 Those will have an effect on code size, which we need to
6371 consider here. This calculation makes rather pessimistic
6372 worst-case assumptions. */
6373 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == CODE_LABEL
)
6376 if (chunk_size
< S390_POOL_CHUNK_MIN
6377 && curr_pool
->size
< S390_POOL_CHUNK_MIN
6378 && !section_switch_p
)
6381 /* Pool chunks can only be inserted after BARRIERs ... */
6382 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == BARRIER
)
6384 s390_end_pool (curr_pool
, insn
);
6389 /* ... so if we don't find one in time, create one. */
6390 else if (chunk_size
> S390_POOL_CHUNK_MAX
6391 || curr_pool
->size
> S390_POOL_CHUNK_MAX
6392 || section_switch_p
)
6394 rtx label
, jump
, barrier
;
6396 if (!section_switch_p
)
6398 /* We can insert the barrier only after a 'real' insn. */
6399 if (GET_CODE (insn
) != INSN
&& GET_CODE (insn
) != CALL_INSN
)
6401 if (get_attr_length (insn
) == 0)
6403 /* Don't separate LTREL_BASE from the corresponding
6404 LTREL_OFFSET load. */
6410 gcc_assert (!pending_ltrel
);
6412 /* The old pool has to end before the section switch
6413 note in order to make it part of the current
6415 insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
);
6418 label
= gen_label_rtx ();
6419 jump
= emit_jump_insn_after (gen_jump (label
), insn
);
6420 barrier
= emit_barrier_after (jump
);
6421 insn
= emit_label_after (label
, barrier
);
6422 JUMP_LABEL (jump
) = label
;
6423 LABEL_NUSES (label
) = 1;
6425 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (jump
, -1);
6426 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (barrier
, -1);
6427 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (insn
, -1);
6429 s390_end_pool (curr_pool
, barrier
);
6437 s390_end_pool (curr_pool
, NULL_RTX
);
6438 gcc_assert (!pending_ltrel
);
6440 /* Find all labels that are branched into
6441 from an insn belonging to a different chunk. */
6443 far_labels
= BITMAP_ALLOC (NULL
);
6445 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
6447 /* Labels marked with LABEL_PRESERVE_P can be target
6448 of non-local jumps, so we have to mark them.
6449 The same holds for named labels.
6451 Don't do that, however, if it is the label before
6454 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == CODE_LABEL
6455 && (LABEL_PRESERVE_P (insn
) || LABEL_NAME (insn
)))
6457 rtx vec_insn
= next_real_insn (insn
);
6458 rtx vec_pat
= vec_insn
&& GET_CODE (vec_insn
) == JUMP_INSN
?
6459 PATTERN (vec_insn
) : NULL_RTX
;
6461 || !(GET_CODE (vec_pat
) == ADDR_VEC
6462 || GET_CODE (vec_pat
) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
))
6463 bitmap_set_bit (far_labels
, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (insn
));
6466 /* If we have a direct jump (conditional or unconditional)
6467 or a casesi jump, check all potential targets. */
6468 else if (GET_CODE (insn
) == JUMP_INSN
)
6470 rtx pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
6471 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
&& XVECLEN (pat
, 0) > 2)
6472 pat
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 0);
6474 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
6476 rtx label
= JUMP_LABEL (insn
);
6479 if (s390_find_pool (pool_list
, label
)
6480 != s390_find_pool (pool_list
, insn
))
6481 bitmap_set_bit (far_labels
, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (label
));
6484 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
6485 && XVECLEN (pat
, 0) == 2
6486 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 0)) == SET
6487 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 1)) == USE
6488 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 1), 0)) == LABEL_REF
)
6490 /* Find the jump table used by this casesi jump. */
6491 rtx vec_label
= XEXP (XEXP (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 1), 0), 0);
6492 rtx vec_insn
= next_real_insn (vec_label
);
6493 rtx vec_pat
= vec_insn
&& GET_CODE (vec_insn
) == JUMP_INSN
?
6494 PATTERN (vec_insn
) : NULL_RTX
;
6496 && (GET_CODE (vec_pat
) == ADDR_VEC
6497 || GET_CODE (vec_pat
) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
))
6499 int i
, diff_p
= GET_CODE (vec_pat
) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
;
6501 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (vec_pat
, diff_p
); i
++)
6503 rtx label
= XEXP (XVECEXP (vec_pat
, diff_p
, i
), 0);
6505 if (s390_find_pool (pool_list
, label
)
6506 != s390_find_pool (pool_list
, insn
))
6507 bitmap_set_bit (far_labels
, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (label
));
6514 /* Insert base register reload insns before every pool. */
6516 for (curr_pool
= pool_list
; curr_pool
; curr_pool
= curr_pool
->next
)
6518 rtx new_insn
= gen_reload_base (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
,
6520 rtx insn
= curr_pool
->first_insn
;
6521 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (emit_insn_before (new_insn
, insn
), -1);
6524 /* Insert base register reload insns at every far label. */
6526 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
6527 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == CODE_LABEL
6528 && bitmap_bit_p (far_labels
, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (insn
)))
6530 struct constant_pool
*pool
= s390_find_pool (pool_list
, insn
);
6533 rtx new_insn
= gen_reload_base (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
,
6535 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (emit_insn_after (new_insn
, insn
), -1);
6540 BITMAP_FREE (far_labels
);
6543 /* Recompute insn addresses. */
6545 init_insn_lengths ();
6546 shorten_branches (get_insns ());
6551 /* POOL_LIST is a chunk list as prepared by s390_chunkify_start.
6552 After we have decided to use this list, finish implementing
6553 all changes to the current function as required. */
6556 s390_chunkify_finish (struct constant_pool
*pool_list
)
6558 struct constant_pool
*curr_pool
= NULL
;
6562 /* Replace all literal pool references. */
6564 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
6567 replace_ltrel_base (&PATTERN (insn
));
6569 curr_pool
= s390_find_pool (pool_list
, insn
);
6573 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
|| GET_CODE (insn
) == CALL_INSN
)
6575 rtx addr
, pool_ref
= NULL_RTX
;
6576 find_constant_pool_ref (PATTERN (insn
), &pool_ref
);
6579 if (s390_execute_label (insn
))
6580 addr
= s390_find_execute (curr_pool
, insn
);
6582 addr
= s390_find_constant (curr_pool
,
6583 get_pool_constant (pool_ref
),
6584 get_pool_mode (pool_ref
));
6586 replace_constant_pool_ref (&PATTERN (insn
), pool_ref
, addr
);
6587 INSN_CODE (insn
) = -1;
6592 /* Dump out all literal pools. */
6594 for (curr_pool
= pool_list
; curr_pool
; curr_pool
= curr_pool
->next
)
6595 s390_dump_pool (curr_pool
, 0);
6597 /* Free pool list. */
6601 struct constant_pool
*next
= pool_list
->next
;
6602 s390_free_pool (pool_list
);
6607 /* POOL_LIST is a chunk list as prepared by s390_chunkify_start.
6608 We have decided we cannot use this list, so revert all changes
6609 to the current function that were done by s390_chunkify_start. */
6612 s390_chunkify_cancel (struct constant_pool
*pool_list
)
6614 struct constant_pool
*curr_pool
= NULL
;
6617 /* Remove all pool placeholder insns. */
6619 for (curr_pool
= pool_list
; curr_pool
; curr_pool
= curr_pool
->next
)
6621 /* Did we insert an extra barrier? Remove it. */
6622 rtx barrier
= PREV_INSN (curr_pool
->pool_insn
);
6623 rtx jump
= barrier
? PREV_INSN (barrier
) : NULL_RTX
;
6624 rtx label
= NEXT_INSN (curr_pool
->pool_insn
);
6626 if (jump
&& GET_CODE (jump
) == JUMP_INSN
6627 && barrier
&& GET_CODE (barrier
) == BARRIER
6628 && label
&& GET_CODE (label
) == CODE_LABEL
6629 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (jump
)) == SET
6630 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (jump
)) == pc_rtx
6631 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (jump
))) == LABEL_REF
6632 && XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (jump
)), 0) == label
)
6635 remove_insn (barrier
);
6636 remove_insn (label
);
6639 remove_insn (curr_pool
->pool_insn
);
6642 /* Remove all base register reload insns. */
6644 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; )
6646 rtx next_insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
6648 if (GET_CODE (insn
) == INSN
6649 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
6650 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))) == UNSPEC
6651 && XINT (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
)), 1) == UNSPEC_RELOAD_BASE
)
6657 /* Free pool list. */
6661 struct constant_pool
*next
= pool_list
->next
;
6662 s390_free_pool (pool_list
);
6667 /* Output the constant pool entry EXP in mode MODE with alignment ALIGN. */
6670 s390_output_pool_entry (rtx exp
, enum machine_mode mode
, unsigned int align
)
6674 switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
))
6677 case MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT
:
6678 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (exp
) == CONST_DOUBLE
);
6680 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r
, exp
);
6681 assemble_real (r
, mode
, align
);
6685 assemble_integer (exp
, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
), align
, 1);
6686 mark_symbol_refs_as_used (exp
);
6695 /* Return an RTL expression representing the value of the return address
6696 for the frame COUNT steps up from the current frame. FRAME is the
6697 frame pointer of that frame. */
6700 s390_return_addr_rtx (int count
, rtx frame ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
6705 /* Without backchain, we fail for all but the current frame. */
6707 if (!TARGET_BACKCHAIN
&& count
> 0)
6710 /* For the current frame, we need to make sure the initial
6711 value of RETURN_REGNUM is actually saved. */
6715 /* On non-z architectures branch splitting could overwrite r14. */
6716 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
6717 return get_hard_reg_initial_val (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
);
6720 cfun_frame_layout
.save_return_addr_p
= true;
6721 return gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, return_address_pointer_rtx
);
6725 if (TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
6726 offset
= -2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
6728 offset
= RETURN_REGNUM
* UNITS_PER_WORD
;
6730 addr
= plus_constant (frame
, offset
);
6731 addr
= memory_address (Pmode
, addr
);
6732 return gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, addr
);
6735 /* Return an RTL expression representing the back chain stored in
6736 the current stack frame. */
6739 s390_back_chain_rtx (void)
6743 gcc_assert (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
);
6745 if (TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
6746 chain
= plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx
,
6747 STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
- UNITS_PER_WORD
);
6749 chain
= stack_pointer_rtx
;
6751 chain
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, chain
);
6755 /* Find first call clobbered register unused in a function.
6756 This could be used as base register in a leaf function
6757 or for holding the return address before epilogue. */
6760 find_unused_clobbered_reg (void)
6763 for (i
= 0; i
< 6; i
++)
6764 if (!df_regs_ever_live_p (i
))
6770 /* Helper function for s390_regs_ever_clobbered. Sets the fields in DATA for all
6771 clobbered hard regs in SETREG. */
6774 s390_reg_clobbered_rtx (rtx setreg
, const_rtx set_insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, void *data
)
6776 int *regs_ever_clobbered
= (int *)data
;
6777 unsigned int i
, regno
;
6778 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (setreg
);
6780 if (GET_CODE (setreg
) == SUBREG
)
6782 rtx inner
= SUBREG_REG (setreg
);
6783 if (!GENERAL_REG_P (inner
))
6785 regno
= subreg_regno (setreg
);
6787 else if (GENERAL_REG_P (setreg
))
6788 regno
= REGNO (setreg
);
6793 i
< regno
+ HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno
, mode
);
6795 regs_ever_clobbered
[i
] = 1;
6798 /* Walks through all basic blocks of the current function looking
6799 for clobbered hard regs using s390_reg_clobbered_rtx. The fields
6800 of the passed integer array REGS_EVER_CLOBBERED are set to one for
6801 each of those regs. */
6804 s390_regs_ever_clobbered (int *regs_ever_clobbered
)
6810 memset (regs_ever_clobbered
, 0, 16 * sizeof (int));
6812 /* For non-leaf functions we have to consider all call clobbered regs to be
6814 if (!current_function_is_leaf
)
6816 for (i
= 0; i
< 16; i
++)
6817 regs_ever_clobbered
[i
] = call_really_used_regs
[i
];
6820 /* Make the "magic" eh_return registers live if necessary. For regs_ever_live
6821 this work is done by liveness analysis (mark_regs_live_at_end).
6822 Special care is needed for functions containing landing pads. Landing pads
6823 may use the eh registers, but the code which sets these registers is not
6824 contained in that function. Hence s390_regs_ever_clobbered is not able to
6825 deal with this automatically. */
6826 if (crtl
->calls_eh_return
|| cfun
->machine
->has_landing_pad_p
)
6827 for (i
= 0; EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (i
) != INVALID_REGNUM
; i
++)
6828 if (crtl
->calls_eh_return
6829 || (cfun
->machine
->has_landing_pad_p
6830 && df_regs_ever_live_p (EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (i
))))
6831 regs_ever_clobbered
[EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (i
)] = 1;
6833 /* For nonlocal gotos all call-saved registers have to be saved.
6834 This flag is also set for the unwinding code in libgcc.
6835 See expand_builtin_unwind_init. For regs_ever_live this is done by
6837 if (cfun
->has_nonlocal_label
)
6838 for (i
= 0; i
< 16; i
++)
6839 if (!call_really_used_regs
[i
])
6840 regs_ever_clobbered
[i
] = 1;
6842 FOR_EACH_BB (cur_bb
)
6844 FOR_BB_INSNS (cur_bb
, cur_insn
)
6846 if (INSN_P (cur_insn
))
6847 note_stores (PATTERN (cur_insn
),
6848 s390_reg_clobbered_rtx
,
6849 regs_ever_clobbered
);
6854 /* Determine the frame area which actually has to be accessed
6855 in the function epilogue. The values are stored at the
6856 given pointers AREA_BOTTOM (address of the lowest used stack
6857 address) and AREA_TOP (address of the first item which does
6858 not belong to the stack frame). */
6861 s390_frame_area (int *area_bottom
, int *area_top
)
6869 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
!= -1)
6871 b
= (cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
6872 + cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
* UNITS_PER_WORD
);
6873 t
= b
+ (cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
6874 - cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
+ 1) * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
6877 if (TARGET_64BIT
&& cfun_save_high_fprs_p
)
6879 b
= MIN (b
, cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
);
6880 t
= MAX (t
, (cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
6881 + cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
* 8));
6885 for (i
= 2; i
< 4; i
++)
6886 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
))
6888 b
= MIN (b
, cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
+ (i
- 2) * 8);
6889 t
= MAX (t
, cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
+ (i
- 1) * 8);
6896 /* Fill cfun->machine with info about register usage of current function.
6897 Return in CLOBBERED_REGS which GPRs are currently considered set. */
6900 s390_register_info (int clobbered_regs
[])
6904 /* fprs 8 - 15 are call saved for 64 Bit ABI. */
6905 cfun_frame_layout
.fpr_bitmap
= 0;
6906 cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
= 0;
6908 for (i
= 24; i
< 32; i
++)
6909 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (i
) && !global_regs
[i
])
6911 cfun_set_fpr_bit (i
- 16);
6912 cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
++;
6915 /* Find first and last gpr to be saved. We trust regs_ever_live
6916 data, except that we don't save and restore global registers.
6918 Also, all registers with special meaning to the compiler need
6919 to be handled extra. */
6921 s390_regs_ever_clobbered (clobbered_regs
);
6923 for (i
= 0; i
< 16; i
++)
6924 clobbered_regs
[i
] = clobbered_regs
[i
] && !global_regs
[i
] && !fixed_regs
[i
];
6926 if (frame_pointer_needed
)
6927 clobbered_regs
[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
] = 1;
6930 clobbered_regs
[PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
]
6931 |= df_regs_ever_live_p (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
);
6933 clobbered_regs
[BASE_REGNUM
]
6934 |= (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
6935 && REGNO (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
) == BASE_REGNUM
);
6937 clobbered_regs
[RETURN_REGNUM
]
6938 |= (!current_function_is_leaf
6939 || TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
6940 || cfun
->machine
->split_branches_pending_p
6941 || cfun_frame_layout
.save_return_addr_p
6942 || crtl
->calls_eh_return
6945 clobbered_regs
[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
]
6946 |= (!current_function_is_leaf
6947 || TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
6948 || cfun_save_high_fprs_p
6949 || get_frame_size () > 0
6950 || cfun
->calls_alloca
6953 for (i
= 6; i
< 16; i
++)
6954 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (i
) || clobbered_regs
[i
])
6956 for (j
= 15; j
> i
; j
--)
6957 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (j
) || clobbered_regs
[j
])
6962 /* Nothing to save/restore. */
6963 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
= -1;
6964 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr_slot
= -1;
6965 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
= -1;
6966 cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
= -1;
6967 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
= -1;
6968 cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
= -1;
6972 /* Save slots for gprs from i to j. */
6973 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
= i
;
6974 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr_slot
= j
;
6976 for (i
= cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
;
6977 i
< cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr_slot
+ 1;
6979 if (clobbered_regs
[i
])
6982 for (j
= cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr_slot
; j
> i
; j
--)
6983 if (clobbered_regs
[j
])
6986 if (i
== cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr_slot
+ 1)
6988 /* Nothing to save/restore. */
6989 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
= -1;
6990 cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
= -1;
6991 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
= -1;
6992 cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
= -1;
6996 /* Save / Restore from gpr i to j. */
6997 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
= i
;
6998 cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
= i
;
6999 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
= j
;
7000 cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
= j
;
7006 /* Varargs functions need to save gprs 2 to 6. */
7007 if (cfun
->va_list_gpr_size
7008 && crtl
->args
.info
.gprs
< GP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
7010 int min_gpr
= crtl
->args
.info
.gprs
;
7011 int max_gpr
= min_gpr
+ cfun
->va_list_gpr_size
;
7012 if (max_gpr
> GP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
7013 max_gpr
= GP_ARG_NUM_REG
;
7015 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
== -1
7016 || cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
> 2 + min_gpr
)
7018 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
= 2 + min_gpr
;
7019 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
= 2 + min_gpr
;
7022 if (cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
== -1
7023 || cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
< 2 + max_gpr
- 1)
7025 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
= 2 + max_gpr
- 1;
7026 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr_slot
= 2 + max_gpr
- 1;
7030 /* Mark f0, f2 for 31 bit and f0-f4 for 64 bit to be saved. */
7031 if (TARGET_HARD_FLOAT
&& cfun
->va_list_fpr_size
7032 && crtl
->args
.info
.fprs
< FP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
7034 int min_fpr
= crtl
->args
.info
.fprs
;
7035 int max_fpr
= min_fpr
+ cfun
->va_list_fpr_size
;
7036 if (max_fpr
> FP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
7037 max_fpr
= FP_ARG_NUM_REG
;
7039 /* ??? This is currently required to ensure proper location
7040 of the fpr save slots within the va_list save area. */
7041 if (TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7044 for (i
= min_fpr
; i
< max_fpr
; i
++)
7045 cfun_set_fpr_bit (i
);
7050 for (i
= 2; i
< 4; i
++)
7051 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (i
+ 16) && !global_regs
[i
+ 16])
7052 cfun_set_fpr_bit (i
);
7055 /* Fill cfun->machine with info about frame of current function. */
7058 s390_frame_info (void)
7062 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
= get_frame_size ();
7063 if (!TARGET_64BIT
&& cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
> 0x7fff0000)
7064 fatal_error ("total size of local variables exceeds architecture limit");
7066 if (!TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7068 cfun_frame_layout
.backchain_offset
= 0;
7069 cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
= 16 * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
7070 cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
+ 2 * 8;
7071 cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
= -cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
* 8;
7072 cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
= (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
7075 else if (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
) /* kernel stack layout */
7077 cfun_frame_layout
.backchain_offset
= (STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
7079 cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
7080 = (cfun_frame_layout
.backchain_offset
7081 - (STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
- cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
+ 1)
7086 cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
7087 = (cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
7088 - 8 * (cfun_fpr_bit_p (2) + cfun_fpr_bit_p (3)));
7090 cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
7091 = (cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
7092 - 8 * (cfun_fpr_bit_p (0) + cfun_fpr_bit_p (1)));
7096 /* On 31 bit we have to care about alignment of the
7097 floating point regs to provide fastest access. */
7098 cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
7099 = ((cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
7100 & ~(STACK_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1))
7101 - 8 * (cfun_fpr_bit_p (0) + cfun_fpr_bit_p (1)));
7103 cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
7104 = (cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
7105 - 8 * (cfun_fpr_bit_p (2) + cfun_fpr_bit_p (3)));
7108 else /* no backchain */
7110 cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
7111 = (STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
7112 - 8 * (cfun_fpr_bit_p (2) + cfun_fpr_bit_p (3)));
7114 cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
7115 = (cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
7116 - 8 * (cfun_fpr_bit_p (0) + cfun_fpr_bit_p (1)));
7118 cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
7119 = cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
- cfun_gprs_save_area_size
;
7122 if (current_function_is_leaf
7123 && !TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
7124 && cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
== 0
7125 && !cfun_save_high_fprs_p
7126 && !cfun
->calls_alloca
7130 if (!TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7131 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+= (STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
7132 + crtl
->outgoing_args_size
7133 + cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
* 8);
7136 if (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
)
7137 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
7139 /* No alignment trouble here because f8-f15 are only saved under
7141 cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
= (MIN (MIN (cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
,
7142 cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
),
7143 cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
)
7144 - cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
* 8);
7146 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+= cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
* 8;
7148 for (i
= 0; i
< 8; i
++)
7149 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
))
7150 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+= 8;
7152 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+= cfun_gprs_save_area_size
;
7154 /* If under 31 bit an odd number of gprs has to be saved we have to adjust
7155 the frame size to sustain 8 byte alignment of stack frames. */
7156 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
= ((cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+
7157 STACK_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
7158 & ~(STACK_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1));
7160 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+= crtl
->outgoing_args_size
;
7164 /* Generate frame layout. Fills in register and frame data for the current
7165 function in cfun->machine. This routine can be called multiple times;
7166 it will re-do the complete frame layout every time. */
7169 s390_init_frame_layout (void)
7171 HOST_WIDE_INT frame_size
;
7173 int clobbered_regs
[16];
7175 /* On S/390 machines, we may need to perform branch splitting, which
7176 will require both base and return address register. We have no
7177 choice but to assume we're going to need them until right at the
7178 end of the machine dependent reorg phase. */
7179 if (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
7180 cfun
->machine
->split_branches_pending_p
= true;
7184 frame_size
= cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
;
7186 /* Try to predict whether we'll need the base register. */
7187 base_used
= cfun
->machine
->split_branches_pending_p
7188 || crtl
->uses_const_pool
7189 || (!DISP_IN_RANGE (frame_size
)
7190 && !CONST_OK_FOR_K (frame_size
));
7192 /* Decide which register to use as literal pool base. In small
7193 leaf functions, try to use an unused call-clobbered register
7194 as base register to avoid save/restore overhead. */
7196 cfun
->machine
->base_reg
= NULL_RTX
;
7197 else if (current_function_is_leaf
&& !df_regs_ever_live_p (5))
7198 cfun
->machine
->base_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 5);
7200 cfun
->machine
->base_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, BASE_REGNUM
);
7202 s390_register_info (clobbered_regs
);
7205 while (frame_size
!= cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
);
7208 /* Update frame layout. Recompute actual register save data based on
7209 current info and update regs_ever_live for the special registers.
7210 May be called multiple times, but may never cause *more* registers
7211 to be saved than s390_init_frame_layout allocated room for. */
7214 s390_update_frame_layout (void)
7216 int clobbered_regs
[16];
7218 s390_register_info (clobbered_regs
);
7220 df_set_regs_ever_live (BASE_REGNUM
,
7221 clobbered_regs
[BASE_REGNUM
] ? true : false);
7222 df_set_regs_ever_live (RETURN_REGNUM
,
7223 clobbered_regs
[RETURN_REGNUM
] ? true : false);
7224 df_set_regs_ever_live (STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
,
7225 clobbered_regs
[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
] ? true : false);
7227 if (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
)
7228 df_set_regs_ever_live (REGNO (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
), true);
7231 /* Return true if it is legal to put a value with MODE into REGNO. */
7234 s390_hard_regno_mode_ok (unsigned int regno
, enum machine_mode mode
)
7236 switch (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno
))
7239 if (REGNO_PAIR_OK (regno
, mode
))
7241 if (mode
== SImode
|| mode
== DImode
)
7244 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
) && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT
)
7249 if (FRAME_REGNO_P (regno
) && mode
== Pmode
)
7254 if (REGNO_PAIR_OK (regno
, mode
))
7257 || (mode
!= TFmode
&& mode
!= TCmode
&& mode
!= TDmode
))
7262 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_CC
)
7266 if (REGNO_PAIR_OK (regno
, mode
))
7268 if (mode
== SImode
|| mode
== Pmode
)
7279 /* Return nonzero if register OLD_REG can be renamed to register NEW_REG. */
7282 s390_hard_regno_rename_ok (unsigned int old_reg
, unsigned int new_reg
)
7284 /* Once we've decided upon a register to use as base register, it must
7285 no longer be used for any other purpose. */
7286 if (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
)
7287 if (REGNO (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
) == old_reg
7288 || REGNO (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
) == new_reg
)
7294 /* Maximum number of registers to represent a value of mode MODE
7295 in a register of class RCLASS. */
7298 s390_class_max_nregs (enum reg_class rclass
, enum machine_mode mode
)
7303 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
7304 return 2 * ((GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / 2 + 8 - 1) / 8);
7306 return (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + 8 - 1) / 8;
7308 return (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + 4 - 1) / 4;
7312 return (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
7315 /* Return true if register FROM can be eliminated via register TO. */
7318 s390_can_eliminate (int from
, int to
)
7320 /* On zSeries machines, we have not marked the base register as fixed.
7321 Instead, we have an elimination rule BASE_REGNUM -> BASE_REGNUM.
7322 If a function requires the base register, we say here that this
7323 elimination cannot be performed. This will cause reload to free
7324 up the base register (as if it were fixed). On the other hand,
7325 if the current function does *not* require the base register, we
7326 say here the elimination succeeds, which in turn allows reload
7327 to allocate the base register for any other purpose. */
7328 if (from
== BASE_REGNUM
&& to
== BASE_REGNUM
)
7330 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
7332 s390_init_frame_layout ();
7333 return cfun
->machine
->base_reg
== NULL_RTX
;
7339 /* Everything else must point into the stack frame. */
7340 gcc_assert (to
== STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
7341 || to
== HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
);
7343 gcc_assert (from
== FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7344 || from
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
7345 || from
== RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
);
7347 /* Make sure we actually saved the return address. */
7348 if (from
== RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
)
7349 if (!crtl
->calls_eh_return
7351 && !cfun_frame_layout
.save_return_addr_p
)
7357 /* Return offset between register FROM and TO initially after prolog. */
7360 s390_initial_elimination_offset (int from
, int to
)
7362 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
7365 /* ??? Why are we called for non-eliminable pairs? */
7366 if (!s390_can_eliminate (from
, to
))
7371 case FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
:
7372 offset
= (get_frame_size()
7373 + STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
7374 + crtl
->outgoing_args_size
);
7377 case ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
:
7378 s390_init_frame_layout ();
7379 offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+ STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
;
7382 case RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
:
7383 s390_init_frame_layout ();
7384 index
= RETURN_REGNUM
- cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
;
7385 gcc_assert (index
>= 0);
7386 offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+ cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
;
7387 offset
+= index
* UNITS_PER_WORD
;
7401 /* Emit insn to save fpr REGNUM at offset OFFSET relative
7402 to register BASE. Return generated insn. */
7405 save_fpr (rtx base
, int offset
, int regnum
)
7408 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (DFmode
, plus_constant (base
, offset
));
7410 if (regnum
>= 16 && regnum
<= (16 + FP_ARG_NUM_REG
))
7411 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_varargs_alias_set ());
7413 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
7415 return emit_move_insn (addr
, gen_rtx_REG (DFmode
, regnum
));
7418 /* Emit insn to restore fpr REGNUM from offset OFFSET relative
7419 to register BASE. Return generated insn. */
7422 restore_fpr (rtx base
, int offset
, int regnum
)
7425 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (DFmode
, plus_constant (base
, offset
));
7426 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
7428 return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (DFmode
, regnum
), addr
);
7431 /* Generate insn to save registers FIRST to LAST into
7432 the register save area located at offset OFFSET
7433 relative to register BASE. */
7436 save_gprs (rtx base
, int offset
, int first
, int last
)
7438 rtx addr
, insn
, note
;
7441 addr
= plus_constant (base
, offset
);
7442 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, addr
);
7444 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
7446 /* Special-case single register. */
7450 insn
= gen_movdi (addr
, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, first
));
7452 insn
= gen_movsi (addr
, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, first
));
7454 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7459 insn
= gen_store_multiple (addr
,
7460 gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, first
),
7461 GEN_INT (last
- first
+ 1));
7463 if (first
<= 6 && cfun
->stdarg
)
7464 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn
), 0); i
++)
7466 rtx mem
= XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, i
), 0);
7469 set_mem_alias_set (mem
, get_varargs_alias_set ());
7472 /* We need to set the FRAME_RELATED flag on all SETs
7473 inside the store-multiple pattern.
7475 However, we must not emit DWARF records for registers 2..5
7476 if they are stored for use by variable arguments ...
7478 ??? Unfortunately, it is not enough to simply not the
7479 FRAME_RELATED flags for those SETs, because the first SET
7480 of the PARALLEL is always treated as if it had the flag
7481 set, even if it does not. Therefore we emit a new pattern
7482 without those registers as REG_FRAME_RELATED_EXPR note. */
7486 rtx pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
7488 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
7489 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) == SET
)
7490 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) = 1;
7492 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7496 addr
= plus_constant (base
, offset
+ (6 - first
) * UNITS_PER_WORD
);
7497 note
= gen_store_multiple (gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, addr
),
7498 gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 6),
7499 GEN_INT (last
- 6 + 1));
7500 note
= PATTERN (note
);
7503 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_FRAME_RELATED_EXPR
,
7504 note
, REG_NOTES (insn
));
7506 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (note
, 0); i
++)
7507 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (note
, 0, i
)) == SET
)
7508 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (XVECEXP (note
, 0, i
)) = 1;
7510 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7516 /* Generate insn to restore registers FIRST to LAST from
7517 the register save area located at offset OFFSET
7518 relative to register BASE. */
7521 restore_gprs (rtx base
, int offset
, int first
, int last
)
7525 addr
= plus_constant (base
, offset
);
7526 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, addr
);
7527 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
7529 /* Special-case single register. */
7533 insn
= gen_movdi (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, first
), addr
);
7535 insn
= gen_movsi (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, first
), addr
);
7540 insn
= gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, first
),
7542 GEN_INT (last
- first
+ 1));
7546 /* Return insn sequence to load the GOT register. */
7548 static GTY(()) rtx got_symbol
;
7550 s390_load_got (void)
7556 got_symbol
= gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
7557 SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS (got_symbol
) = SYMBOL_FLAG_LOCAL
;
7562 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
7564 emit_move_insn (pic_offset_table_rtx
, got_symbol
);
7570 offset
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, got_symbol
),
7571 UNSPEC_LTREL_OFFSET
);
7572 offset
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, offset
);
7573 offset
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, offset
);
7575 emit_move_insn (pic_offset_table_rtx
, offset
);
7577 offset
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, XEXP (offset
, 0)),
7579 offset
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, pic_offset_table_rtx
, offset
);
7581 emit_move_insn (pic_offset_table_rtx
, offset
);
7584 insns
= get_insns ();
7589 /* This ties together stack memory (MEM with an alias set of frame_alias_set)
7590 and the change to the stack pointer. */
7593 s390_emit_stack_tie (void)
7595 rtx mem
= gen_frame_mem (BLKmode
,
7596 gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
));
7598 emit_insn (gen_stack_tie (mem
));
7601 /* Expand the prologue into a bunch of separate insns. */
7604 s390_emit_prologue (void)
7612 /* Complete frame layout. */
7614 s390_update_frame_layout ();
7616 /* Annotate all constant pool references to let the scheduler know
7617 they implicitly use the base register. */
7619 push_topmost_sequence ();
7621 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
7624 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&PATTERN (insn
));
7625 df_insn_rescan (insn
);
7628 pop_topmost_sequence ();
7630 /* Choose best register to use for temp use within prologue.
7631 See below for why TPF must use the register 1. */
7633 if (!has_hard_reg_initial_val (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
)
7634 && !current_function_is_leaf
7635 && !TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
)
7636 temp_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
);
7638 temp_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 1);
7640 /* Save call saved gprs. */
7641 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
!= -1)
7643 insn
= save_gprs (stack_pointer_rtx
,
7644 cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
+
7645 UNITS_PER_WORD
* (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
7646 - cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
),
7647 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
,
7648 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
);
7652 /* Dummy insn to mark literal pool slot. */
7654 if (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
)
7655 emit_insn (gen_main_pool (cfun
->machine
->base_reg
));
7657 offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.f0_offset
;
7659 /* Save f0 and f2. */
7660 for (i
= 0; i
< 2; i
++)
7662 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
))
7664 save_fpr (stack_pointer_rtx
, offset
, i
+ 16);
7667 else if (!TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7671 /* Save f4 and f6. */
7672 offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
;
7673 for (i
= 2; i
< 4; i
++)
7675 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
))
7677 insn
= save_fpr (stack_pointer_rtx
, offset
, i
+ 16);
7680 /* If f4 and f6 are call clobbered they are saved due to stdargs and
7681 therefore are not frame related. */
7682 if (!call_really_used_regs
[i
+ 16])
7683 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7685 else if (!TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7689 if (TARGET_PACKED_STACK
7690 && cfun_save_high_fprs_p
7691 && cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
+ cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
* 8 > 0)
7693 offset
= (cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
7694 + (cfun_frame_layout
.high_fprs
- 1) * 8);
7696 for (i
= 15; i
> 7 && offset
>= 0; i
--)
7697 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
))
7699 insn
= save_fpr (stack_pointer_rtx
, offset
, i
+ 16);
7701 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7704 if (offset
>= cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
)
7708 if (!TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7709 next_fpr
= cfun_save_high_fprs_p
? 31 : 0;
7711 /* Decrement stack pointer. */
7713 if (cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
> 0)
7715 rtx frame_off
= GEN_INT (-cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
);
7717 if (s390_stack_size
)
7719 HOST_WIDE_INT stack_guard
;
7721 if (s390_stack_guard
)
7722 stack_guard
= s390_stack_guard
;
7725 /* If no value for stack guard is provided the smallest power of 2
7726 larger than the current frame size is chosen. */
7728 while (stack_guard
< cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
)
7732 if (cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
>= s390_stack_size
)
7734 warning (0, "frame size of function %qs is "
7735 HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
7736 " bytes exceeding user provided stack limit of "
7737 HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
" bytes. "
7738 "An unconditional trap is added.",
7739 current_function_name(), cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
,
7741 emit_insn (gen_trap ());
7745 HOST_WIDE_INT stack_check_mask
= ((s390_stack_size
- 1)
7746 & ~(stack_guard
- 1));
7747 rtx t
= gen_rtx_AND (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
7748 GEN_INT (stack_check_mask
));
7750 gen_cmpdi (t
, const0_rtx
);
7752 gen_cmpsi (t
, const0_rtx
);
7754 emit_insn (gen_conditional_trap (gen_rtx_EQ (CCmode
,
7755 gen_rtx_REG (CCmode
,
7762 if (s390_warn_framesize
> 0
7763 && cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
>= s390_warn_framesize
)
7764 warning (0, "frame size of %qs is " HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
" bytes",
7765 current_function_name (), cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
);
7767 if (s390_warn_dynamicstack_p
&& cfun
->calls_alloca
)
7768 warning (0, "%qs uses dynamic stack allocation", current_function_name ());
7770 /* Save incoming stack pointer into temp reg. */
7771 if (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
|| next_fpr
)
7772 insn
= emit_insn (gen_move_insn (temp_reg
, stack_pointer_rtx
));
7774 /* Subtract frame size from stack pointer. */
7776 if (DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (frame_off
)))
7778 insn
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
7779 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
7781 insn
= emit_insn (insn
);
7785 if (!CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (frame_off
)))
7786 frame_off
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, frame_off
);
7788 insn
= emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
, frame_off
));
7789 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&PATTERN (insn
));
7792 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7794 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_FRAME_RELATED_EXPR
,
7795 gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
7796 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
7797 GEN_INT (-cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
))),
7800 /* Set backchain. */
7802 if (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
)
7804 if (cfun_frame_layout
.backchain_offset
)
7805 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
,
7806 plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx
,
7807 cfun_frame_layout
.backchain_offset
));
7809 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
7810 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
7811 insn
= emit_insn (gen_move_insn (addr
, temp_reg
));
7814 /* If we support asynchronous exceptions (e.g. for Java),
7815 we need to make sure the backchain pointer is set up
7816 before any possibly trapping memory access. */
7818 if (TARGET_BACKCHAIN
&& flag_non_call_exceptions
)
7820 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, gen_rtx_SCRATCH (VOIDmode
));
7821 emit_clobber (addr
);
7825 /* Save fprs 8 - 15 (64 bit ABI). */
7827 if (cfun_save_high_fprs_p
&& next_fpr
)
7829 /* If the stack might be accessed through a different register
7830 we have to make sure that the stack pointer decrement is not
7831 moved below the use of the stack slots. */
7832 s390_emit_stack_tie ();
7834 insn
= emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (temp_reg
,
7835 GEN_INT (cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
)));
7839 for (i
= 24; i
<= next_fpr
; i
++)
7840 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
- 16))
7842 rtx addr
= plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx
,
7843 cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
7844 + cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
7847 insn
= save_fpr (temp_reg
, offset
, i
);
7849 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7851 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_FRAME_RELATED_EXPR
,
7852 gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
,
7853 gen_rtx_MEM (DFmode
, addr
),
7854 gen_rtx_REG (DFmode
, i
)),
7859 /* Set frame pointer, if needed. */
7861 if (frame_pointer_needed
)
7863 insn
= emit_move_insn (hard_frame_pointer_rtx
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
7864 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn
) = 1;
7867 /* Set up got pointer, if needed. */
7869 if (flag_pic
&& df_regs_ever_live_p (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
))
7871 rtx insns
= s390_load_got ();
7873 for (insn
= insns
; insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
7874 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&PATTERN (insn
));
7879 if (TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
)
7881 /* Generate a BAS instruction to serve as a function
7882 entry intercept to facilitate the use of tracing
7883 algorithms located at the branch target. */
7884 emit_insn (gen_prologue_tpf ());
7886 /* Emit a blockage here so that all code
7887 lies between the profiling mechanisms. */
7888 emit_insn (gen_blockage ());
7892 /* Expand the epilogue into a bunch of separate insns. */
7895 s390_emit_epilogue (bool sibcall
)
7897 rtx frame_pointer
, return_reg
;
7898 int area_bottom
, area_top
, offset
= 0;
7903 if (TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
)
7906 /* Generate a BAS instruction to serve as a function
7907 entry intercept to facilitate the use of tracing
7908 algorithms located at the branch target. */
7910 /* Emit a blockage here so that all code
7911 lies between the profiling mechanisms. */
7912 emit_insn (gen_blockage ());
7914 emit_insn (gen_epilogue_tpf ());
7917 /* Check whether to use frame or stack pointer for restore. */
7919 frame_pointer
= (frame_pointer_needed
7920 ? hard_frame_pointer_rtx
: stack_pointer_rtx
);
7922 s390_frame_area (&area_bottom
, &area_top
);
7924 /* Check whether we can access the register save area.
7925 If not, increment the frame pointer as required. */
7927 if (area_top
<= area_bottom
)
7929 /* Nothing to restore. */
7931 else if (DISP_IN_RANGE (cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+ area_bottom
)
7932 && DISP_IN_RANGE (cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
+ area_top
- 1))
7934 /* Area is in range. */
7935 offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
;
7939 rtx insn
, frame_off
;
7941 offset
= area_bottom
< 0 ? -area_bottom
: 0;
7942 frame_off
= GEN_INT (cfun_frame_layout
.frame_size
- offset
);
7944 if (DISP_IN_RANGE (INTVAL (frame_off
)))
7946 insn
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, frame_pointer
,
7947 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, frame_pointer
, frame_off
));
7948 insn
= emit_insn (insn
);
7952 if (!CONST_OK_FOR_K (INTVAL (frame_off
)))
7953 frame_off
= force_const_mem (Pmode
, frame_off
);
7955 insn
= emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (frame_pointer
, frame_off
));
7956 annotate_constant_pool_refs (&PATTERN (insn
));
7960 /* Restore call saved fprs. */
7964 if (cfun_save_high_fprs_p
)
7966 next_offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.f8_offset
;
7967 for (i
= 24; i
< 32; i
++)
7969 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
- 16))
7971 restore_fpr (frame_pointer
,
7972 offset
+ next_offset
, i
);
7981 next_offset
= cfun_frame_layout
.f4_offset
;
7982 for (i
= 18; i
< 20; i
++)
7984 if (cfun_fpr_bit_p (i
- 16))
7986 restore_fpr (frame_pointer
,
7987 offset
+ next_offset
, i
);
7990 else if (!TARGET_PACKED_STACK
)
7996 /* Return register. */
7998 return_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
);
8000 /* Restore call saved gprs. */
8002 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
!= -1)
8007 /* Check for global register and save them
8008 to stack location from where they get restored. */
8010 for (i
= cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
;
8011 i
<= cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
;
8014 /* These registers are special and need to be
8015 restored in any case. */
8016 if (i
== STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
8017 || i
== RETURN_REGNUM
8019 || (flag_pic
&& i
== (int)PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
))
8024 addr
= plus_constant (frame_pointer
,
8025 offset
+ cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
8026 + (i
- cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
)
8028 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, addr
);
8029 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
8030 emit_move_insn (addr
, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, i
));
8036 /* Fetch return address from stack before load multiple,
8037 this will do good for scheduling. */
8039 if (cfun_frame_layout
.save_return_addr_p
8040 || (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
< BASE_REGNUM
8041 && cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
> RETURN_REGNUM
))
8043 int return_regnum
= find_unused_clobbered_reg();
8046 return_reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, return_regnum
);
8048 addr
= plus_constant (frame_pointer
,
8049 offset
+ cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
8051 - cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
)
8053 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, addr
);
8054 set_mem_alias_set (addr
, get_frame_alias_set ());
8055 emit_move_insn (return_reg
, addr
);
8059 insn
= restore_gprs (frame_pointer
,
8060 offset
+ cfun_frame_layout
.gprs_offset
8061 + (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
8062 - cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr_slot
)
8064 cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
,
8065 cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
);
8072 /* Return to caller. */
8074 p
= rtvec_alloc (2);
8076 RTVEC_ELT (p
, 0) = gen_rtx_RETURN (VOIDmode
);
8077 RTVEC_ELT (p
, 1) = gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode
, return_reg
);
8078 emit_jump_insn (gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, p
));
8083 /* Return the size in bytes of a function argument of
8084 type TYPE and/or mode MODE. At least one of TYPE or
8085 MODE must be specified. */
8088 s390_function_arg_size (enum machine_mode mode
, const_tree type
)
8091 return int_size_in_bytes (type
);
8093 /* No type info available for some library calls ... */
8094 if (mode
!= BLKmode
)
8095 return GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
8097 /* If we have neither type nor mode, abort */
8101 /* Return true if a function argument of type TYPE and mode MODE
8102 is to be passed in a floating-point register, if available. */
8105 s390_function_arg_float (enum machine_mode mode
, tree type
)
8107 int size
= s390_function_arg_size (mode
, type
);
8111 /* Soft-float changes the ABI: no floating-point registers are used. */
8112 if (TARGET_SOFT_FLOAT
)
8115 /* No type info available for some library calls ... */
8117 return mode
== SFmode
|| mode
== DFmode
|| mode
== SDmode
|| mode
== DDmode
;
8119 /* The ABI says that record types with a single member are treated
8120 just like that member would be. */
8121 while (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
)
8123 tree field
, single
= NULL_TREE
;
8125 for (field
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); field
; field
= TREE_CHAIN (field
))
8127 if (TREE_CODE (field
) != FIELD_DECL
)
8130 if (single
== NULL_TREE
)
8131 single
= TREE_TYPE (field
);
8136 if (single
== NULL_TREE
)
8142 return TREE_CODE (type
) == REAL_TYPE
;
8145 /* Return true if a function argument of type TYPE and mode MODE
8146 is to be passed in an integer register, or a pair of integer
8147 registers, if available. */
8150 s390_function_arg_integer (enum machine_mode mode
, tree type
)
8152 int size
= s390_function_arg_size (mode
, type
);
8156 /* No type info available for some library calls ... */
8158 return GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
8159 || (TARGET_SOFT_FLOAT
&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
));
8161 /* We accept small integral (and similar) types. */
8162 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
8163 || POINTER_TYPE_P (type
)
8164 || TREE_CODE (type
) == OFFSET_TYPE
8165 || (TARGET_SOFT_FLOAT
&& TREE_CODE (type
) == REAL_TYPE
))
8168 /* We also accept structs of size 1, 2, 4, 8 that are not
8169 passed in floating-point registers. */
8170 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
)
8171 && exact_log2 (size
) >= 0
8172 && !s390_function_arg_float (mode
, type
))
8178 /* Return 1 if a function argument of type TYPE and mode MODE
8179 is to be passed by reference. The ABI specifies that only
8180 structures of size 1, 2, 4, or 8 bytes are passed by value,
8181 all other structures (and complex numbers) are passed by
8185 s390_pass_by_reference (CUMULATIVE_ARGS
*ca ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
8186 enum machine_mode mode
, const_tree type
,
8187 bool named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8189 int size
= s390_function_arg_size (mode
, type
);
8195 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
) && exact_log2 (size
) < 0)
8198 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == COMPLEX_TYPE
8199 || TREE_CODE (type
) == VECTOR_TYPE
)
8206 /* Update the data in CUM to advance over an argument of mode MODE and
8207 data type TYPE. (TYPE is null for libcalls where that information
8208 may not be available.). The boolean NAMED specifies whether the
8209 argument is a named argument (as opposed to an unnamed argument
8210 matching an ellipsis). */
8213 s390_function_arg_advance (CUMULATIVE_ARGS
*cum
, enum machine_mode mode
,
8214 tree type
, int named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8216 if (s390_function_arg_float (mode
, type
))
8220 else if (s390_function_arg_integer (mode
, type
))
8222 int size
= s390_function_arg_size (mode
, type
);
8223 cum
->gprs
+= ((size
+ UNITS_PER_WORD
-1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
);
8229 /* Define where to put the arguments to a function.
8230 Value is zero to push the argument on the stack,
8231 or a hard register in which to store the argument.
8233 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
8234 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
8235 This is null for libcalls where that information may
8237 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
8238 the preceding args and about the function being called.
8239 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
8240 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
8242 On S/390, we use general purpose registers 2 through 6 to
8243 pass integer, pointer, and certain structure arguments, and
8244 floating point registers 0 and 2 (0, 2, 4, and 6 on 64-bit)
8245 to pass floating point arguments. All remaining arguments
8246 are pushed to the stack. */
8249 s390_function_arg (CUMULATIVE_ARGS
*cum
, enum machine_mode mode
, tree type
,
8250 int named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8252 if (s390_function_arg_float (mode
, type
))
8254 if (cum
->fprs
+ 1 > FP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
8257 return gen_rtx_REG (mode
, cum
->fprs
+ 16);
8259 else if (s390_function_arg_integer (mode
, type
))
8261 int size
= s390_function_arg_size (mode
, type
);
8262 int n_gprs
= (size
+ UNITS_PER_WORD
-1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8264 if (cum
->gprs
+ n_gprs
> GP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
8267 return gen_rtx_REG (mode
, cum
->gprs
+ 2);
8270 /* After the real arguments, expand_call calls us once again
8271 with a void_type_node type. Whatever we return here is
8272 passed as operand 2 to the call expanders.
8274 We don't need this feature ... */
8275 else if (type
== void_type_node
)
8281 /* Return true if return values of type TYPE should be returned
8282 in a memory buffer whose address is passed by the caller as
8283 hidden first argument. */
8286 s390_return_in_memory (const_tree type
, const_tree fundecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8288 /* We accept small integral (and similar) types. */
8289 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
8290 || POINTER_TYPE_P (type
)
8291 || TREE_CODE (type
) == OFFSET_TYPE
8292 || TREE_CODE (type
) == REAL_TYPE
)
8293 return int_size_in_bytes (type
) > 8;
8295 /* Aggregates and similar constructs are always returned
8297 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
)
8298 || TREE_CODE (type
) == COMPLEX_TYPE
8299 || TREE_CODE (type
) == VECTOR_TYPE
)
8302 /* ??? We get called on all sorts of random stuff from
8303 aggregate_value_p. We can't abort, but it's not clear
8304 what's safe to return. Pretend it's a struct I guess. */
8308 /* Define where to return a (scalar) value of type TYPE.
8309 If TYPE is null, define where to return a (scalar)
8310 value of mode MODE from a libcall. */
8313 s390_function_value (const_tree type
, enum machine_mode mode
)
8317 int unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
8318 mode
= promote_mode (type
, TYPE_MODE (type
), &unsignedp
, 1);
8321 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
|| SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
));
8322 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) <= 8);
8324 if (TARGET_HARD_FLOAT
&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
))
8325 return gen_rtx_REG (mode
, 16);
8327 return gen_rtx_REG (mode
, 2);
8331 /* Create and return the va_list datatype.
8333 On S/390, va_list is an array type equivalent to
8335 typedef struct __va_list_tag
8339 void *__overflow_arg_area;
8340 void *__reg_save_area;
8343 where __gpr and __fpr hold the number of general purpose
8344 or floating point arguments used up to now, respectively,
8345 __overflow_arg_area points to the stack location of the
8346 next argument passed on the stack, and __reg_save_area
8347 always points to the start of the register area in the
8348 call frame of the current function. The function prologue
8349 saves all registers used for argument passing into this
8350 area if the function uses variable arguments. */
8353 s390_build_builtin_va_list (void)
8355 tree f_gpr
, f_fpr
, f_ovf
, f_sav
, record
, type_decl
;
8357 record
= lang_hooks
.types
.make_type (RECORD_TYPE
);
8360 build_decl (TYPE_DECL
, get_identifier ("__va_list_tag"), record
);
8362 f_gpr
= build_decl (FIELD_DECL
, get_identifier ("__gpr"),
8363 long_integer_type_node
);
8364 f_fpr
= build_decl (FIELD_DECL
, get_identifier ("__fpr"),
8365 long_integer_type_node
);
8366 f_ovf
= build_decl (FIELD_DECL
, get_identifier ("__overflow_arg_area"),
8368 f_sav
= build_decl (FIELD_DECL
, get_identifier ("__reg_save_area"),
8371 va_list_gpr_counter_field
= f_gpr
;
8372 va_list_fpr_counter_field
= f_fpr
;
8374 DECL_FIELD_CONTEXT (f_gpr
) = record
;
8375 DECL_FIELD_CONTEXT (f_fpr
) = record
;
8376 DECL_FIELD_CONTEXT (f_ovf
) = record
;
8377 DECL_FIELD_CONTEXT (f_sav
) = record
;
8379 TREE_CHAIN (record
) = type_decl
;
8380 TYPE_NAME (record
) = type_decl
;
8381 TYPE_FIELDS (record
) = f_gpr
;
8382 TREE_CHAIN (f_gpr
) = f_fpr
;
8383 TREE_CHAIN (f_fpr
) = f_ovf
;
8384 TREE_CHAIN (f_ovf
) = f_sav
;
8386 layout_type (record
);
8388 /* The correct type is an array type of one element. */
8389 return build_array_type (record
, build_index_type (size_zero_node
));
8392 /* Implement va_start by filling the va_list structure VALIST.
8393 STDARG_P is always true, and ignored.
8394 NEXTARG points to the first anonymous stack argument.
8396 The following global variables are used to initialize
8397 the va_list structure:
8400 holds number of gprs and fprs used for named arguments.
8401 crtl->args.arg_offset_rtx:
8402 holds the offset of the first anonymous stack argument
8403 (relative to the virtual arg pointer). */
8406 s390_va_start (tree valist
, rtx nextarg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8408 HOST_WIDE_INT n_gpr
, n_fpr
;
8410 tree f_gpr
, f_fpr
, f_ovf
, f_sav
;
8411 tree gpr
, fpr
, ovf
, sav
, t
;
8413 f_gpr
= TYPE_FIELDS (TREE_TYPE (va_list_type_node
));
8414 f_fpr
= TREE_CHAIN (f_gpr
);
8415 f_ovf
= TREE_CHAIN (f_fpr
);
8416 f_sav
= TREE_CHAIN (f_ovf
);
8418 valist
= build_va_arg_indirect_ref (valist
);
8419 gpr
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_gpr
), valist
, f_gpr
, NULL_TREE
);
8420 fpr
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_fpr
), valist
, f_fpr
, NULL_TREE
);
8421 ovf
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_ovf
), valist
, f_ovf
, NULL_TREE
);
8422 sav
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_sav
), valist
, f_sav
, NULL_TREE
);
8424 /* Count number of gp and fp argument registers used. */
8426 n_gpr
= crtl
->args
.info
.gprs
;
8427 n_fpr
= crtl
->args
.info
.fprs
;
8429 if (cfun
->va_list_gpr_size
)
8431 t
= build2 (MODIFY_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (gpr
), gpr
,
8432 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE
, n_gpr
));
8433 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (t
) = 1;
8434 expand_expr (t
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8437 if (cfun
->va_list_fpr_size
)
8439 t
= build2 (MODIFY_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (fpr
), fpr
,
8440 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE
, n_fpr
));
8441 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (t
) = 1;
8442 expand_expr (t
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8445 /* Find the overflow area. */
8446 if (n_gpr
+ cfun
->va_list_gpr_size
> GP_ARG_NUM_REG
8447 || n_fpr
+ cfun
->va_list_fpr_size
> FP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
8449 t
= make_tree (TREE_TYPE (ovf
), virtual_incoming_args_rtx
);
8451 off
= INTVAL (crtl
->args
.arg_offset_rtx
);
8452 off
= off
< 0 ? 0 : off
;
8453 if (TARGET_DEBUG_ARG
)
8454 fprintf (stderr
, "va_start: n_gpr = %d, n_fpr = %d off %d\n",
8455 (int)n_gpr
, (int)n_fpr
, off
);
8457 t
= build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (ovf
), t
, size_int (off
));
8459 t
= build2 (MODIFY_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (ovf
), ovf
, t
);
8460 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (t
) = 1;
8461 expand_expr (t
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8464 /* Find the register save area. */
8465 if ((cfun
->va_list_gpr_size
&& n_gpr
< GP_ARG_NUM_REG
)
8466 || (cfun
->va_list_fpr_size
&& n_fpr
< FP_ARG_NUM_REG
))
8468 t
= make_tree (TREE_TYPE (sav
), return_address_pointer_rtx
);
8469 t
= build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (sav
), t
,
8470 size_int (-RETURN_REGNUM
* UNITS_PER_WORD
));
8472 t
= build2 (MODIFY_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (sav
), sav
, t
);
8473 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (t
) = 1;
8474 expand_expr (t
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8478 /* Implement va_arg by updating the va_list structure
8479 VALIST as required to retrieve an argument of type
8480 TYPE, and returning that argument.
8482 Generates code equivalent to:
8484 if (integral value) {
8485 if (size <= 4 && args.gpr < 5 ||
8486 size > 4 && args.gpr < 4 )
8487 ret = args.reg_save_area[args.gpr+8]
8489 ret = *args.overflow_arg_area++;
8490 } else if (float value) {
8492 ret = args.reg_save_area[args.fpr+64]
8494 ret = *args.overflow_arg_area++;
8495 } else if (aggregate value) {
8497 ret = *args.reg_save_area[args.gpr]
8499 ret = **args.overflow_arg_area++;
8503 s390_gimplify_va_arg (tree valist
, tree type
, gimple_seq
*pre_p
,
8504 gimple_seq
*post_p ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8506 tree f_gpr
, f_fpr
, f_ovf
, f_sav
;
8507 tree gpr
, fpr
, ovf
, sav
, reg
, t
, u
;
8508 int indirect_p
, size
, n_reg
, sav_ofs
, sav_scale
, max_reg
;
8509 tree lab_false
, lab_over
, addr
;
8511 f_gpr
= TYPE_FIELDS (TREE_TYPE (va_list_type_node
));
8512 f_fpr
= TREE_CHAIN (f_gpr
);
8513 f_ovf
= TREE_CHAIN (f_fpr
);
8514 f_sav
= TREE_CHAIN (f_ovf
);
8516 valist
= build_va_arg_indirect_ref (valist
);
8517 gpr
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_gpr
), valist
, f_gpr
, NULL_TREE
);
8518 fpr
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_fpr
), valist
, f_fpr
, NULL_TREE
);
8519 sav
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_sav
), valist
, f_sav
, NULL_TREE
);
8521 /* The tree for args* cannot be shared between gpr/fpr and ovf since
8522 both appear on a lhs. */
8523 valist
= unshare_expr (valist
);
8524 ovf
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (f_ovf
), valist
, f_ovf
, NULL_TREE
);
8526 size
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
8528 if (pass_by_reference (NULL
, TYPE_MODE (type
), type
, false))
8530 if (TARGET_DEBUG_ARG
)
8532 fprintf (stderr
, "va_arg: aggregate type");
8536 /* Aggregates are passed by reference. */
8541 /* kernel stack layout on 31 bit: It is assumed here that no padding
8542 will be added by s390_frame_info because for va_args always an even
8543 number of gprs has to be saved r15-r2 = 14 regs. */
8544 sav_ofs
= 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8545 sav_scale
= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8546 size
= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8547 max_reg
= GP_ARG_NUM_REG
- n_reg
;
8549 else if (s390_function_arg_float (TYPE_MODE (type
), type
))
8551 if (TARGET_DEBUG_ARG
)
8553 fprintf (stderr
, "va_arg: float type");
8557 /* FP args go in FP registers, if present. */
8561 sav_ofs
= 16 * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8563 max_reg
= FP_ARG_NUM_REG
- n_reg
;
8567 if (TARGET_DEBUG_ARG
)
8569 fprintf (stderr
, "va_arg: other type");
8573 /* Otherwise into GP registers. */
8576 n_reg
= (size
+ UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8578 /* kernel stack layout on 31 bit: It is assumed here that no padding
8579 will be added by s390_frame_info because for va_args always an even
8580 number of gprs has to be saved r15-r2 = 14 regs. */
8581 sav_ofs
= 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8583 if (size
< UNITS_PER_WORD
)
8584 sav_ofs
+= UNITS_PER_WORD
- size
;
8586 sav_scale
= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
8587 max_reg
= GP_ARG_NUM_REG
- n_reg
;
8590 /* Pull the value out of the saved registers ... */
8592 lab_false
= create_artificial_label ();
8593 lab_over
= create_artificial_label ();
8594 addr
= create_tmp_var (ptr_type_node
, "addr");
8595 DECL_POINTER_ALIAS_SET (addr
) = get_varargs_alias_set ();
8597 t
= fold_convert (TREE_TYPE (reg
), size_int (max_reg
));
8598 t
= build2 (GT_EXPR
, boolean_type_node
, reg
, t
);
8599 u
= build1 (GOTO_EXPR
, void_type_node
, lab_false
);
8600 t
= build3 (COND_EXPR
, void_type_node
, t
, u
, NULL_TREE
);
8601 gimplify_and_add (t
, pre_p
);
8603 t
= build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
, ptr_type_node
, sav
,
8604 size_int (sav_ofs
));
8605 u
= build2 (MULT_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (reg
), reg
,
8606 fold_convert (TREE_TYPE (reg
), size_int (sav_scale
)));
8607 t
= build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
, ptr_type_node
, t
, fold_convert (sizetype
, u
));
8609 gimplify_assign (addr
, t
, pre_p
);
8611 gimple_seq_add_stmt (pre_p
, gimple_build_goto (lab_over
));
8613 gimple_seq_add_stmt (pre_p
, gimple_build_label (lab_false
));
8616 /* ... Otherwise out of the overflow area. */
8619 if (size
< UNITS_PER_WORD
)
8620 t
= build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
, ptr_type_node
, t
,
8621 size_int (UNITS_PER_WORD
- size
));
8623 gimplify_expr (&t
, pre_p
, NULL
, is_gimple_val
, fb_rvalue
);
8625 gimplify_assign (addr
, t
, pre_p
);
8627 t
= build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
, ptr_type_node
, t
,
8629 gimplify_assign (ovf
, t
, pre_p
);
8631 gimple_seq_add_stmt (pre_p
, gimple_build_label (lab_over
));
8634 /* Increment register save count. */
8636 u
= build2 (PREINCREMENT_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (reg
), reg
,
8637 fold_convert (TREE_TYPE (reg
), size_int (n_reg
)));
8638 gimplify_and_add (u
, pre_p
);
8642 t
= build_pointer_type (build_pointer_type (type
));
8643 addr
= fold_convert (t
, addr
);
8644 addr
= build_va_arg_indirect_ref (addr
);
8648 t
= build_pointer_type (type
);
8649 addr
= fold_convert (t
, addr
);
8652 return build_va_arg_indirect_ref (addr
);
8660 S390_BUILTIN_THREAD_POINTER
,
8661 S390_BUILTIN_SET_THREAD_POINTER
,
8666 static unsigned int const code_for_builtin_64
[S390_BUILTIN_max
] = {
8671 static unsigned int const code_for_builtin_31
[S390_BUILTIN_max
] = {
8677 s390_init_builtins (void)
8681 ftype
= build_function_type (ptr_type_node
, void_list_node
);
8682 add_builtin_function ("__builtin_thread_pointer", ftype
,
8683 S390_BUILTIN_THREAD_POINTER
, BUILT_IN_MD
,
8686 ftype
= build_function_type_list (void_type_node
, ptr_type_node
, NULL_TREE
);
8687 add_builtin_function ("__builtin_set_thread_pointer", ftype
,
8688 S390_BUILTIN_SET_THREAD_POINTER
, BUILT_IN_MD
,
8692 /* Expand an expression EXP that calls a built-in function,
8693 with result going to TARGET if that's convenient
8694 (and in mode MODE if that's convenient).
8695 SUBTARGET may be used as the target for computing one of EXP's operands.
8696 IGNORE is nonzero if the value is to be ignored. */
8699 s390_expand_builtin (tree exp
, rtx target
, rtx subtarget ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
8700 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
8701 int ignore ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
8705 unsigned int const *code_for_builtin
=
8706 TARGET_64BIT
? code_for_builtin_64
: code_for_builtin_31
;
8708 tree fndecl
= TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp
), 0);
8709 unsigned int fcode
= DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl
);
8710 enum insn_code icode
;
8711 rtx op
[MAX_ARGS
], pat
;
8715 call_expr_arg_iterator iter
;
8717 if (fcode
>= S390_BUILTIN_max
)
8718 internal_error ("bad builtin fcode");
8719 icode
= code_for_builtin
[fcode
];
8721 internal_error ("bad builtin fcode");
8723 nonvoid
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fndecl
)) != void_type_node
;
8726 FOR_EACH_CALL_EXPR_ARG (arg
, iter
, exp
)
8728 const struct insn_operand_data
*insn_op
;
8730 if (arg
== error_mark_node
)
8732 if (arity
> MAX_ARGS
)
8735 insn_op
= &insn_data
[icode
].operand
[arity
+ nonvoid
];
8737 op
[arity
] = expand_expr (arg
, NULL_RTX
, insn_op
->mode
, 0);
8739 if (!(*insn_op
->predicate
) (op
[arity
], insn_op
->mode
))
8740 op
[arity
] = copy_to_mode_reg (insn_op
->mode
, op
[arity
]);
8746 enum machine_mode tmode
= insn_data
[icode
].operand
[0].mode
;
8748 || GET_MODE (target
) != tmode
8749 || !(*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[0].predicate
) (target
, tmode
))
8750 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
);
8756 pat
= GEN_FCN (icode
) (target
);
8760 pat
= GEN_FCN (icode
) (target
, op
[0]);
8762 pat
= GEN_FCN (icode
) (op
[0]);
8765 pat
= GEN_FCN (icode
) (target
, op
[0], op
[1]);
8781 /* Output assembly code for the trampoline template to
8784 On S/390, we use gpr 1 internally in the trampoline code;
8785 gpr 0 is used to hold the static chain. */
8788 s390_trampoline_template (FILE *file
)
8791 op
[0] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 0);
8792 op
[1] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 1);
8796 output_asm_insn ("basr\t%1,0", op
);
8797 output_asm_insn ("lmg\t%0,%1,14(%1)", op
);
8798 output_asm_insn ("br\t%1", op
);
8799 ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (file
, (HOST_WIDE_INT
)(TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
- 10));
8803 output_asm_insn ("basr\t%1,0", op
);
8804 output_asm_insn ("lm\t%0,%1,6(%1)", op
);
8805 output_asm_insn ("br\t%1", op
);
8806 ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (file
, (HOST_WIDE_INT
)(TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
- 8));
8810 /* Emit RTL insns to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
8811 FNADDR is an RTX for the address of the function's pure code.
8812 CXT is an RTX for the static chain value for the function. */
8815 s390_initialize_trampoline (rtx addr
, rtx fnaddr
, rtx cxt
)
8817 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
,
8818 memory_address (Pmode
,
8819 plus_constant (addr
, (TARGET_64BIT
? 16 : 8)))), cxt
);
8820 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
,
8821 memory_address (Pmode
,
8822 plus_constant (addr
, (TARGET_64BIT
? 24 : 12)))), fnaddr
);
8825 /* Output assembler code to FILE to increment profiler label # LABELNO
8826 for profiling a function entry. */
8829 s390_function_profiler (FILE *file
, int labelno
)
8834 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (label
, "LP", labelno
);
8836 fprintf (file
, "# function profiler \n");
8838 op
[0] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
);
8839 op
[1] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
);
8840 op
[1] = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, plus_constant (op
[1], UNITS_PER_WORD
));
8842 op
[2] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 1);
8843 op
[3] = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, label
);
8844 SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS (op
[3]) = SYMBOL_FLAG_LOCAL
;
8846 op
[4] = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, "_mcount");
8849 op
[4] = gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, op
[4]), UNSPEC_PLT
);
8850 op
[4] = gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, op
[4]);
8855 output_asm_insn ("stg\t%0,%1", op
);
8856 output_asm_insn ("larl\t%2,%3", op
);
8857 output_asm_insn ("brasl\t%0,%4", op
);
8858 output_asm_insn ("lg\t%0,%1", op
);
8862 op
[6] = gen_label_rtx ();
8864 output_asm_insn ("st\t%0,%1", op
);
8865 output_asm_insn ("bras\t%2,%l6", op
);
8866 output_asm_insn (".long\t%4", op
);
8867 output_asm_insn (".long\t%3", op
);
8868 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[6]));
8869 output_asm_insn ("l\t%0,0(%2)", op
);
8870 output_asm_insn ("l\t%2,4(%2)", op
);
8871 output_asm_insn ("basr\t%0,%0", op
);
8872 output_asm_insn ("l\t%0,%1", op
);
8876 op
[5] = gen_label_rtx ();
8877 op
[6] = gen_label_rtx ();
8879 output_asm_insn ("st\t%0,%1", op
);
8880 output_asm_insn ("bras\t%2,%l6", op
);
8881 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[5]));
8882 output_asm_insn (".long\t%4-%l5", op
);
8883 output_asm_insn (".long\t%3-%l5", op
);
8884 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[6]));
8885 output_asm_insn ("lr\t%0,%2", op
);
8886 output_asm_insn ("a\t%0,0(%2)", op
);
8887 output_asm_insn ("a\t%2,4(%2)", op
);
8888 output_asm_insn ("basr\t%0,%0", op
);
8889 output_asm_insn ("l\t%0,%1", op
);
8893 /* Encode symbol attributes (local vs. global, tls model) of a SYMBOL_REF
8894 into its SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS. */
8897 s390_encode_section_info (tree decl
, rtx rtl
, int first
)
8899 default_encode_section_info (decl
, rtl
, first
);
8901 if (TREE_CODE (decl
) == VAR_DECL
)
8903 /* If a variable has a forced alignment to < 2 bytes, mark it
8904 with SYMBOL_FLAG_ALIGN1 to prevent it from being used as LARL
8906 if (DECL_USER_ALIGN (decl
) && DECL_ALIGN (decl
) < 16)
8907 SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS (XEXP (rtl
, 0)) |= SYMBOL_FLAG_ALIGN1
;
8908 if (!DECL_SIZE (decl
)
8909 || !DECL_ALIGN (decl
)
8910 || !host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (decl
), 0)
8911 || (DECL_ALIGN (decl
) <= 64
8912 && DECL_ALIGN (decl
) != tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (decl
), 0)))
8913 SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS (XEXP (rtl
, 0)) |= SYMBOL_FLAG_NOT_NATURALLY_ALIGNED
;
8916 /* Literal pool references don't have a decl so they are handled
8917 differently here. We rely on the information in the MEM_ALIGN
8918 entry to decide upon natural alignment. */
8920 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rtl
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
8921 && TREE_CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (rtl
, 0))
8922 && (MEM_ALIGN (rtl
) == 0
8923 || MEM_ALIGN (rtl
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (rtl
))))
8924 SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS (XEXP (rtl
, 0)) |= SYMBOL_FLAG_NOT_NATURALLY_ALIGNED
;
8927 /* Output thunk to FILE that implements a C++ virtual function call (with
8928 multiple inheritance) to FUNCTION. The thunk adjusts the this pointer
8929 by DELTA, and unless VCALL_OFFSET is zero, applies an additional adjustment
8930 stored at VCALL_OFFSET in the vtable whose address is located at offset 0
8931 relative to the resulting this pointer. */
8934 s390_output_mi_thunk (FILE *file
, tree thunk ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
8935 HOST_WIDE_INT delta
, HOST_WIDE_INT vcall_offset
,
8941 /* Operand 0 is the target function. */
8942 op
[0] = XEXP (DECL_RTL (function
), 0);
8943 if (flag_pic
&& !SYMBOL_REF_LOCAL_P (op
[0]))
8946 op
[0] = gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
, gen_rtvec (1, op
[0]),
8947 TARGET_64BIT
? UNSPEC_PLT
: UNSPEC_GOT
);
8948 op
[0] = gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, op
[0]);
8951 /* Operand 1 is the 'this' pointer. */
8952 if (aggregate_value_p (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (function
)), function
))
8953 op
[1] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 3);
8955 op
[1] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 2);
8957 /* Operand 2 is the delta. */
8958 op
[2] = GEN_INT (delta
);
8960 /* Operand 3 is the vcall_offset. */
8961 op
[3] = GEN_INT (vcall_offset
);
8963 /* Operand 4 is the temporary register. */
8964 op
[4] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 1);
8966 /* Operands 5 to 8 can be used as labels. */
8972 /* Operand 9 can be used for temporary register. */
8975 /* Generate code. */
8978 /* Setup literal pool pointer if required. */
8979 if ((!DISP_IN_RANGE (delta
)
8980 && !CONST_OK_FOR_K (delta
)
8981 && !CONST_OK_FOR_Os (delta
))
8982 || (!DISP_IN_RANGE (vcall_offset
)
8983 && !CONST_OK_FOR_K (vcall_offset
)
8984 && !CONST_OK_FOR_Os (vcall_offset
)))
8986 op
[5] = gen_label_rtx ();
8987 output_asm_insn ("larl\t%4,%5", op
);
8990 /* Add DELTA to this pointer. */
8993 if (CONST_OK_FOR_J (delta
))
8994 output_asm_insn ("la\t%1,%2(%1)", op
);
8995 else if (DISP_IN_RANGE (delta
))
8996 output_asm_insn ("lay\t%1,%2(%1)", op
);
8997 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_K (delta
))
8998 output_asm_insn ("aghi\t%1,%2", op
);
8999 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_Os (delta
))
9000 output_asm_insn ("agfi\t%1,%2", op
);
9003 op
[6] = gen_label_rtx ();
9004 output_asm_insn ("agf\t%1,%6-%5(%4)", op
);
9008 /* Perform vcall adjustment. */
9011 if (DISP_IN_RANGE (vcall_offset
))
9013 output_asm_insn ("lg\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9014 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%1,%3(%4)", op
);
9016 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_K (vcall_offset
))
9018 output_asm_insn ("lghi\t%4,%3", op
);
9019 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9020 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%1,0(%4)", op
);
9022 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_Os (vcall_offset
))
9024 output_asm_insn ("lgfi\t%4,%3", op
);
9025 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9026 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%1,0(%4)", op
);
9030 op
[7] = gen_label_rtx ();
9031 output_asm_insn ("llgf\t%4,%7-%5(%4)", op
);
9032 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9033 output_asm_insn ("ag\t%1,0(%4)", op
);
9037 /* Jump to target. */
9038 output_asm_insn ("jg\t%0", op
);
9040 /* Output literal pool if required. */
9043 output_asm_insn (".align\t4", op
);
9044 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9045 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[5]));
9049 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9050 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[6]));
9051 output_asm_insn (".long\t%2", op
);
9055 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9056 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[7]));
9057 output_asm_insn (".long\t%3", op
);
9062 /* Setup base pointer if required. */
9064 || (!DISP_IN_RANGE (delta
)
9065 && !CONST_OK_FOR_K (delta
)
9066 && !CONST_OK_FOR_Os (delta
))
9067 || (!DISP_IN_RANGE (delta
)
9068 && !CONST_OK_FOR_K (vcall_offset
)
9069 && !CONST_OK_FOR_Os (vcall_offset
)))
9071 op
[5] = gen_label_rtx ();
9072 output_asm_insn ("basr\t%4,0", op
);
9073 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9074 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[5]));
9077 /* Add DELTA to this pointer. */
9080 if (CONST_OK_FOR_J (delta
))
9081 output_asm_insn ("la\t%1,%2(%1)", op
);
9082 else if (DISP_IN_RANGE (delta
))
9083 output_asm_insn ("lay\t%1,%2(%1)", op
);
9084 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_K (delta
))
9085 output_asm_insn ("ahi\t%1,%2", op
);
9086 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_Os (delta
))
9087 output_asm_insn ("afi\t%1,%2", op
);
9090 op
[6] = gen_label_rtx ();
9091 output_asm_insn ("a\t%1,%6-%5(%4)", op
);
9095 /* Perform vcall adjustment. */
9098 if (CONST_OK_FOR_J (vcall_offset
))
9100 output_asm_insn ("l\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9101 output_asm_insn ("a\t%1,%3(%4)", op
);
9103 else if (DISP_IN_RANGE (vcall_offset
))
9105 output_asm_insn ("l\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9106 output_asm_insn ("ay\t%1,%3(%4)", op
);
9108 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_K (vcall_offset
))
9110 output_asm_insn ("lhi\t%4,%3", op
);
9111 output_asm_insn ("a\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9112 output_asm_insn ("a\t%1,0(%4)", op
);
9114 else if (CONST_OK_FOR_Os (vcall_offset
))
9116 output_asm_insn ("iilf\t%4,%3", op
);
9117 output_asm_insn ("a\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9118 output_asm_insn ("a\t%1,0(%4)", op
);
9122 op
[7] = gen_label_rtx ();
9123 output_asm_insn ("l\t%4,%7-%5(%4)", op
);
9124 output_asm_insn ("a\t%4,0(%1)", op
);
9125 output_asm_insn ("a\t%1,0(%4)", op
);
9128 /* We had to clobber the base pointer register.
9129 Re-setup the base pointer (with a different base). */
9130 op
[5] = gen_label_rtx ();
9131 output_asm_insn ("basr\t%4,0", op
);
9132 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9133 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[5]));
9136 /* Jump to target. */
9137 op
[8] = gen_label_rtx ();
9140 output_asm_insn ("l\t%4,%8-%5(%4)", op
);
9142 output_asm_insn ("a\t%4,%8-%5(%4)", op
);
9143 /* We cannot call through .plt, since .plt requires %r12 loaded. */
9144 else if (flag_pic
== 1)
9146 output_asm_insn ("a\t%4,%8-%5(%4)", op
);
9147 output_asm_insn ("l\t%4,%0(%4)", op
);
9149 else if (flag_pic
== 2)
9151 op
[9] = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 0);
9152 output_asm_insn ("l\t%9,%8-4-%5(%4)", op
);
9153 output_asm_insn ("a\t%4,%8-%5(%4)", op
);
9154 output_asm_insn ("ar\t%4,%9", op
);
9155 output_asm_insn ("l\t%4,0(%4)", op
);
9158 output_asm_insn ("br\t%4", op
);
9160 /* Output literal pool. */
9161 output_asm_insn (".align\t4", op
);
9163 if (nonlocal
&& flag_pic
== 2)
9164 output_asm_insn (".long\t%0", op
);
9167 op
[0] = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
9168 SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS (op
[0]) = SYMBOL_FLAG_LOCAL
;
9171 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[8]));
9173 output_asm_insn (".long\t%0", op
);
9175 output_asm_insn (".long\t%0-%5", op
);
9179 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9180 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[6]));
9181 output_asm_insn (".long\t%2", op
);
9185 targetm
.asm_out
.internal_label (file
, "L",
9186 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (op
[7]));
9187 output_asm_insn (".long\t%3", op
);
9193 s390_valid_pointer_mode (enum machine_mode mode
)
9195 return (mode
== SImode
|| (TARGET_64BIT
&& mode
== DImode
));
9198 /* Checks whether the given CALL_EXPR would use a caller
9199 saved register. This is used to decide whether sibling call
9200 optimization could be performed on the respective function
9204 s390_call_saved_register_used (tree call_expr
)
9206 CUMULATIVE_ARGS cum
;
9208 enum machine_mode mode
;
9213 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum
, NULL
, NULL
, 0, 0);
9215 for (i
= 0; i
< call_expr_nargs (call_expr
); i
++)
9217 parameter
= CALL_EXPR_ARG (call_expr
, i
);
9218 gcc_assert (parameter
);
9220 /* For an undeclared variable passed as parameter we will get
9221 an ERROR_MARK node here. */
9222 if (TREE_CODE (parameter
) == ERROR_MARK
)
9225 type
= TREE_TYPE (parameter
);
9228 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
9231 if (pass_by_reference (&cum
, mode
, type
, true))
9234 type
= build_pointer_type (type
);
9237 parm_rtx
= s390_function_arg (&cum
, mode
, type
, 0);
9239 s390_function_arg_advance (&cum
, mode
, type
, 0);
9241 if (parm_rtx
&& REG_P (parm_rtx
))
9244 reg
< HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (parm_rtx
), GET_MODE (parm_rtx
));
9246 if (! call_used_regs
[reg
+ REGNO (parm_rtx
)])
9253 /* Return true if the given call expression can be
9254 turned into a sibling call.
9255 DECL holds the declaration of the function to be called whereas
9256 EXP is the call expression itself. */
9259 s390_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree decl
, tree exp
)
9261 /* The TPF epilogue uses register 1. */
9262 if (TARGET_TPF_PROFILING
)
9265 /* The 31 bit PLT code uses register 12 (GOT pointer - caller saved)
9266 which would have to be restored before the sibcall. */
9267 if (!TARGET_64BIT
&& flag_pic
&& decl
&& !targetm
.binds_local_p (decl
))
9270 /* Register 6 on s390 is available as an argument register but unfortunately
9271 "caller saved". This makes functions needing this register for arguments
9272 not suitable for sibcalls. */
9273 return !s390_call_saved_register_used (exp
);
9276 /* Return the fixed registers used for condition codes. */
9279 s390_fixed_condition_code_regs (unsigned int *p1
, unsigned int *p2
)
9282 *p2
= INVALID_REGNUM
;
9287 /* This function is used by the call expanders of the machine description.
9288 It emits the call insn itself together with the necessary operations
9289 to adjust the target address and returns the emitted insn.
9290 ADDR_LOCATION is the target address rtx
9291 TLS_CALL the location of the thread-local symbol
9292 RESULT_REG the register where the result of the call should be stored
9293 RETADDR_REG the register where the return address should be stored
9294 If this parameter is NULL_RTX the call is considered
9295 to be a sibling call. */
9298 s390_emit_call (rtx addr_location
, rtx tls_call
, rtx result_reg
,
9301 bool plt_call
= false;
9307 /* Direct function calls need special treatment. */
9308 if (GET_CODE (addr_location
) == SYMBOL_REF
)
9310 /* When calling a global routine in PIC mode, we must
9311 replace the symbol itself with the PLT stub. */
9312 if (flag_pic
&& !SYMBOL_REF_LOCAL_P (addr_location
))
9314 addr_location
= gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode
,
9315 gen_rtvec (1, addr_location
),
9317 addr_location
= gen_rtx_CONST (Pmode
, addr_location
);
9321 /* Unless we can use the bras(l) insn, force the
9322 routine address into a register. */
9323 if (!TARGET_SMALL_EXEC
&& !TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
9326 addr_location
= legitimize_pic_address (addr_location
, 0);
9328 addr_location
= force_reg (Pmode
, addr_location
);
9332 /* If it is already an indirect call or the code above moved the
9333 SYMBOL_REF to somewhere else make sure the address can be found in
9335 if (retaddr_reg
== NULL_RTX
9336 && GET_CODE (addr_location
) != SYMBOL_REF
9339 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, SIBCALL_REGNUM
), addr_location
);
9340 addr_location
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, SIBCALL_REGNUM
);
9343 addr_location
= gen_rtx_MEM (QImode
, addr_location
);
9344 call
= gen_rtx_CALL (VOIDmode
, addr_location
, const0_rtx
);
9346 if (result_reg
!= NULL_RTX
)
9347 call
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, result_reg
, call
);
9349 if (retaddr_reg
!= NULL_RTX
)
9351 clobber
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, retaddr_reg
);
9353 if (tls_call
!= NULL_RTX
)
9354 vec
= gen_rtvec (3, call
, clobber
,
9355 gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode
, tls_call
));
9357 vec
= gen_rtvec (2, call
, clobber
);
9359 call
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, vec
);
9362 insn
= emit_call_insn (call
);
9364 /* 31-bit PLT stubs and tls calls use the GOT register implicitly. */
9365 if ((!TARGET_64BIT
&& plt_call
) || tls_call
!= NULL_RTX
)
9367 /* s390_function_ok_for_sibcall should
9368 have denied sibcalls in this case. */
9369 gcc_assert (retaddr_reg
!= NULL_RTX
);
9371 use_reg (&CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn
), pic_offset_table_rtx
);
9376 /* Implement CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE. */
9379 s390_conditional_register_usage (void)
9385 fixed_regs
[PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
] = 1;
9386 call_used_regs
[PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
] = 1;
9388 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
9390 fixed_regs
[BASE_REGNUM
] = 0;
9391 call_used_regs
[BASE_REGNUM
] = 0;
9392 fixed_regs
[RETURN_REGNUM
] = 0;
9393 call_used_regs
[RETURN_REGNUM
] = 0;
9397 for (i
= 24; i
< 32; i
++)
9398 call_used_regs
[i
] = call_really_used_regs
[i
] = 0;
9402 for (i
= 18; i
< 20; i
++)
9403 call_used_regs
[i
] = call_really_used_regs
[i
] = 0;
9406 if (TARGET_SOFT_FLOAT
)
9408 for (i
= 16; i
< 32; i
++)
9409 call_used_regs
[i
] = fixed_regs
[i
] = 1;
9413 /* Corresponding function to eh_return expander. */
9415 static GTY(()) rtx s390_tpf_eh_return_symbol
;
9417 s390_emit_tpf_eh_return (rtx target
)
9421 if (!s390_tpf_eh_return_symbol
)
9422 s390_tpf_eh_return_symbol
= gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, "__tpf_eh_return");
9424 reg
= gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, 2);
9426 emit_move_insn (reg
, target
);
9427 insn
= s390_emit_call (s390_tpf_eh_return_symbol
, NULL_RTX
, reg
,
9428 gen_rtx_REG (Pmode
, RETURN_REGNUM
));
9429 use_reg (&CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn
), reg
);
9431 emit_move_insn (EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
, reg
);
9434 /* Rework the prologue/epilogue to avoid saving/restoring
9435 registers unnecessarily. */
9438 s390_optimize_prologue (void)
9440 rtx insn
, new_insn
, next_insn
;
9442 /* Do a final recompute of the frame-related data. */
9444 s390_update_frame_layout ();
9446 /* If all special registers are in fact used, there's nothing we
9447 can do, so no point in walking the insn list. */
9449 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
<= BASE_REGNUM
9450 && cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
>= BASE_REGNUM
9451 && (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
9452 || (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
<= RETURN_REGNUM
9453 && cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
>= RETURN_REGNUM
)))
9456 /* Search for prologue/epilogue insns and replace them. */
9458 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= next_insn
)
9460 int first
, last
, off
;
9461 rtx set
, base
, offset
;
9463 next_insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
9465 if (GET_CODE (insn
) != INSN
)
9468 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == PARALLEL
9469 && store_multiple_operation (PATTERN (insn
), VOIDmode
))
9471 set
= XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0);
9472 first
= REGNO (SET_SRC (set
));
9473 last
= first
+ XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn
), 0) - 1;
9474 offset
= const0_rtx
;
9475 base
= eliminate_constant_term (XEXP (SET_DEST (set
), 0), &offset
);
9476 off
= INTVAL (offset
);
9478 if (GET_CODE (base
) != REG
|| off
< 0)
9480 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
!= -1
9481 && (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
< first
9482 || cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
> last
))
9484 if (REGNO (base
) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
9485 && REGNO (base
) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
9487 if (first
> BASE_REGNUM
|| last
< BASE_REGNUM
)
9490 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
!= -1)
9492 new_insn
= save_gprs (base
,
9493 off
+ (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
9494 - first
) * UNITS_PER_WORD
,
9495 cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
,
9496 cfun_frame_layout
.last_save_gpr
);
9497 new_insn
= emit_insn_before (new_insn
, insn
);
9498 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (new_insn
, -1);
9505 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_save_gpr
== -1
9506 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
9507 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))) == REG
9508 && (REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))) == BASE_REGNUM
9509 || (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
9510 && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))) == RETURN_REGNUM
))
9511 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn
))) == MEM
)
9513 set
= PATTERN (insn
);
9514 first
= REGNO (SET_SRC (set
));
9515 offset
= const0_rtx
;
9516 base
= eliminate_constant_term (XEXP (SET_DEST (set
), 0), &offset
);
9517 off
= INTVAL (offset
);
9519 if (GET_CODE (base
) != REG
|| off
< 0)
9521 if (REGNO (base
) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
9522 && REGNO (base
) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
9529 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == PARALLEL
9530 && load_multiple_operation (PATTERN (insn
), VOIDmode
))
9532 set
= XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0);
9533 first
= REGNO (SET_DEST (set
));
9534 last
= first
+ XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn
), 0) - 1;
9535 offset
= const0_rtx
;
9536 base
= eliminate_constant_term (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 0), &offset
);
9537 off
= INTVAL (offset
);
9539 if (GET_CODE (base
) != REG
|| off
< 0)
9541 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
!= -1
9542 && (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
< first
9543 || cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
> last
))
9545 if (REGNO (base
) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
9546 && REGNO (base
) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
9548 if (first
> BASE_REGNUM
|| last
< BASE_REGNUM
)
9551 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
!= -1)
9553 new_insn
= restore_gprs (base
,
9554 off
+ (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
9555 - first
) * UNITS_PER_WORD
,
9556 cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
,
9557 cfun_frame_layout
.last_restore_gpr
);
9558 new_insn
= emit_insn_before (new_insn
, insn
);
9559 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (new_insn
, -1);
9566 if (cfun_frame_layout
.first_restore_gpr
== -1
9567 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
9568 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn
))) == REG
9569 && (REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn
))) == BASE_REGNUM
9570 || (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
9571 && REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn
))) == RETURN_REGNUM
))
9572 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))) == MEM
)
9574 set
= PATTERN (insn
);
9575 first
= REGNO (SET_DEST (set
));
9576 offset
= const0_rtx
;
9577 base
= eliminate_constant_term (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 0), &offset
);
9578 off
= INTVAL (offset
);
9580 if (GET_CODE (base
) != REG
|| off
< 0)
9582 if (REGNO (base
) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
9583 && REGNO (base
) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
9593 /* Exchange the two operands of COND, and swap its mask so that the
9594 semantics does not change. */
9596 s390_swap_cmp (rtx cond
)
9598 enum rtx_code code
= swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond
));
9599 rtx tmp
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
9601 XEXP (cond
, 0) = XEXP (cond
, 1);
9602 XEXP (cond
, 1) = tmp
;
9603 PUT_CODE (cond
, code
);
9607 /* Returns 1 if INSN reads the value of REG for purposes not related
9608 to addressing of memory, and 0 otherwise. */
9610 s390_non_addr_reg_read_p (rtx reg
, rtx insn
)
9612 return reg_referenced_p (reg
, PATTERN (insn
))
9613 && !reg_used_in_mem_p (REGNO (reg
), PATTERN (insn
));
9617 /* On z10, instructions of the compare-and-branch family have the
9618 property to access the register occurring as second operand with
9619 its bits complemented. If such a compare is grouped with a second
9620 instruction that accesses the same register non-complemented, and
9621 if that register's value is delivered via a bypass, then the
9622 pipeline recycles, thereby causing significant performance decline.
9623 This function locates such situations and exchanges the two
9624 operands of the compare. */
9626 s390_z10_optimize_cmp (void)
9628 rtx insn
, prev_insn
, next_insn
;
9631 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
9633 if (!INSN_P (insn
) || INSN_CODE (insn
) <= 0)
9636 if (get_attr_z10prop (insn
) == Z10PROP_Z10_COBRA
)
9638 rtx op0
, op1
, pattern
, jump_expr
, cond
;
9640 /* Extract the comparisonĀ“s condition and its operands. */
9641 pattern
= single_set (insn
);
9642 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (pattern
) == SET
);
9643 jump_expr
= XEXP (pattern
, 1);
9644 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (jump_expr
) == IF_THEN_ELSE
);
9645 cond
= XEXP (jump_expr
, 0);
9646 op0
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
9647 op1
= XEXP (cond
, 1);
9649 /* Swap the COMPAREĀ“s arguments and its mask if there is a
9650 conflicting access in the previous insn. */
9651 prev_insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
);
9652 if (prev_insn
!= NULL_RTX
&& INSN_P (prev_insn
)
9653 && reg_referenced_p (op1
, PATTERN (prev_insn
)))
9655 s390_swap_cmp (cond
);
9656 op0
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
9657 op1
= XEXP (cond
, 1);
9660 /* Check if there is a conflict with the next insn. If there
9661 was no conflict with the previous insn, then swap the
9662 COMPAREĀ“s arguments and its mask. If we already swapped
9663 the operands, or if swapping them would cause a conflict
9664 with the previous insn, issue a NOP after the COMPARE in
9665 order to separate the two instuctions. */
9666 next_insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
9667 if (next_insn
!= NULL_RTX
&& INSN_P (next_insn
)
9668 && s390_non_addr_reg_read_p (op1
, next_insn
))
9670 if (s390_non_addr_reg_read_p (op0
, prev_insn
))
9672 if (REGNO(op1
) == 0)
9673 emit_insn_after (gen_nop1 (), insn
);
9675 emit_insn_after (gen_nop (), insn
);
9679 s390_swap_cmp (cond
);
9684 /* Adjust branches if we added new instructions. */
9686 shorten_branches (get_insns ());
9690 /* Perform machine-dependent processing. */
9695 bool pool_overflow
= false;
9697 /* Make sure all splits have been performed; splits after
9698 machine_dependent_reorg might confuse insn length counts. */
9699 split_all_insns_noflow ();
9701 /* Install the main literal pool and the associated base
9702 register load insns.
9704 In addition, there are two problematic situations we need
9707 - the literal pool might be > 4096 bytes in size, so that
9708 some of its elements cannot be directly accessed
9710 - a branch target might be > 64K away from the branch, so that
9711 it is not possible to use a PC-relative instruction.
9713 To fix those, we split the single literal pool into multiple
9714 pool chunks, reloading the pool base register at various
9715 points throughout the function to ensure it always points to
9716 the pool chunk the following code expects, and / or replace
9717 PC-relative branches by absolute branches.
9719 However, the two problems are interdependent: splitting the
9720 literal pool can move a branch further away from its target,
9721 causing the 64K limit to overflow, and on the other hand,
9722 replacing a PC-relative branch by an absolute branch means
9723 we need to put the branch target address into the literal
9724 pool, possibly causing it to overflow.
9726 So, we loop trying to fix up both problems until we manage
9727 to satisfy both conditions at the same time. Note that the
9728 loop is guaranteed to terminate as every pass of the loop
9729 strictly decreases the total number of PC-relative branches
9730 in the function. (This is not completely true as there
9731 might be branch-over-pool insns introduced by chunkify_start.
9732 Those never need to be split however.) */
9736 struct constant_pool
*pool
= NULL
;
9738 /* Collect the literal pool. */
9741 pool
= s390_mainpool_start ();
9743 pool_overflow
= true;
9746 /* If literal pool overflowed, start to chunkify it. */
9748 pool
= s390_chunkify_start ();
9750 /* Split out-of-range branches. If this has created new
9751 literal pool entries, cancel current chunk list and
9752 recompute it. zSeries machines have large branch
9753 instructions, so we never need to split a branch. */
9754 if (!TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
&& s390_split_branches ())
9757 s390_chunkify_cancel (pool
);
9759 s390_mainpool_cancel (pool
);
9764 /* If we made it up to here, both conditions are satisfied.
9765 Finish up literal pool related changes. */
9767 s390_chunkify_finish (pool
);
9769 s390_mainpool_finish (pool
);
9771 /* We're done splitting branches. */
9772 cfun
->machine
->split_branches_pending_p
= false;
9776 /* Generate out-of-pool execute target insns. */
9777 if (TARGET_CPU_ZARCH
)
9779 rtx insn
, label
, target
;
9781 for (insn
= get_insns (); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
9783 label
= s390_execute_label (insn
);
9787 gcc_assert (label
!= const0_rtx
);
9789 target
= emit_label (XEXP (label
, 0));
9790 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (target
, -1);
9792 target
= emit_insn (s390_execute_target (insn
));
9793 INSN_ADDRESSES_NEW (target
, -1);
9797 /* Try to optimize prologue and epilogue further. */
9798 s390_optimize_prologue ();
9800 /* Eliminate z10-specific pipeline recycles related to some compare
9803 s390_z10_optimize_cmp ();
9807 /* Initialize GCC target structure. */
9809 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP
9810 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.word\t"
9811 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_DI_OP
9812 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_DI_OP "\t.quad\t"
9813 #undef TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
9814 #define TARGET_ASM_INTEGER s390_assemble_integer
9816 #undef TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
9817 #define TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN ""
9819 #undef TARGET_ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
9820 #define TARGET_ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ""
9822 #undef TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
9823 #define TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS (TARGET_DEFAULT | MASK_FUSED_MADD)
9824 #undef TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
9825 #define TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION s390_handle_option
9827 #undef TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
9828 #define TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO s390_encode_section_info
9831 #undef TARGET_HAVE_TLS
9832 #define TARGET_HAVE_TLS true
9834 #undef TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
9835 #define TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM s390_cannot_force_const_mem
9837 #undef TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
9838 #define TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS s390_delegitimize_address
9840 #undef TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
9841 #define TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY s390_return_in_memory
9843 #undef TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
9844 #define TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS s390_init_builtins
9845 #undef TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
9846 #define TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN s390_expand_builtin
9848 #undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
9849 #define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK s390_output_mi_thunk
9850 #undef TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
9851 #define TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK hook_bool_const_tree_hwi_hwi_const_tree_true
9853 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
9854 #define TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY s390_adjust_priority
9855 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
9856 #define TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE s390_issue_rate
9857 #undef TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
9858 #define TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD s390_first_cycle_multipass_dfa_lookahead
9860 #undef TARGET_CANNOT_COPY_INSN_P
9861 #define TARGET_CANNOT_COPY_INSN_P s390_cannot_copy_insn_p
9862 #undef TARGET_RTX_COSTS
9863 #define TARGET_RTX_COSTS s390_rtx_costs
9864 #undef TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
9865 #define TARGET_ADDRESS_COST s390_address_cost
9867 #undef TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
9868 #define TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG s390_reorg
9870 #undef TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
9871 #define TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE s390_valid_pointer_mode
9873 #undef TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
9874 #define TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST s390_build_builtin_va_list
9875 #undef TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_VA_START
9876 #define TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_VA_START s390_va_start
9877 #undef TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
9878 #define TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR s390_gimplify_va_arg
9880 #undef TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
9881 #define TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS hook_bool_const_tree_true
9882 #undef TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
9883 #define TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN hook_bool_const_tree_true
9884 #undef TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
9885 #define TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE s390_pass_by_reference
9887 #undef TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
9888 #define TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL s390_function_ok_for_sibcall
9890 #undef TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
9891 #define TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS s390_fixed_condition_code_regs
9893 #undef TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
9894 #define TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE s390_cc_modes_compatible
9896 #undef TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
9897 #define TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP hook_constcharptr_const_rtx_null
9900 #undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
9901 #define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL s390_output_dwarf_dtprel
9904 #ifdef TARGET_ALTERNATE_LONG_DOUBLE_MANGLING
9905 #undef TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
9906 #define TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE s390_mangle_type
9909 #undef TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
9910 #define TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P s390_scalar_mode_supported_p
9912 #undef TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
9913 #define TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD s390_secondary_reload
9915 #undef TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
9916 #define TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE s390_libgcc_cmp_return_mode
9918 #undef TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
9919 #define TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE s390_libgcc_shift_count_mode
9921 struct gcc_target targetm
= TARGET_INITIALIZER
;
9923 #include "gt-s390.h"